Broadcasting signal receiver and method for transmitting/receiving broadcasting signal

ABSTRACT

The present invention relates to a digital broadcasting system, when transmitting mobile service data. In order to do so, the present invention performs additional encoding on the mobile service data and outputs the additionally encoded data. Accordingly, robustness is provided to the mobile service data, thereby enabling the mobile service data to respond swiftly and strongly against noise and channel changes.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 illustrates a block diagram showing a general structure of a digital broadcasting system according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 2 illustrates a block diagram of a service multiplexer shown in FIG. 1 of the present invention;

FIG. 3 illustrates a block diagram of a transmitter shown in FIG. 1 of the present invention;

FIG. 4 illustrates a block diagram of a pre-processor shown in FIG. 3 of the present invention;

FIG. 5( a) to FIG. 5( e) illustrate process steps of error correction encoding and error detection encoding according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 6( a) to FIG. 6( d) illustrate process steps of row permutation in super frame units according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B respectively illustrate examples of data structures before and after a data deinterleaver of a digital broadcast transmitting system according to the present invention;

FIG. 8 illustrates a part of data region A of the signal frame shown in FIG. 7A;

FIG. 9( a) to FIG. 9( c) illustrate examples a data structure (arrangement) of transmission (Tx) parameters included in a mobile service data region as signaling data;

FIG. 10 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of the signaling data shown in FIG. 9 being inserted in a signal frame after interleaving in a broadcast transmitting system according to the present invention;

FIGS. 11( a) and 11(b) illustrate examples of acquiring mobile service data included in a particular data group within a burst according to the present invention;

FIGS. 12( a) to 12(c) illustrate other examples of acquiring mobile service data included in a particular data group within a burst according to the present invention;

FIG. 13 illustrates an exemplary process of dividing an RS frame for configuring a data group according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 14( a) and FIG. 14( b) illustrate an exemplary process of dividing an RS frame for configuring a data group according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 15 illustrates exemplary operations of a packet multiplexer for transmitting data groups according to the present invention;

FIG. 16 illustrates a block diagram showing a structure of a block processor according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 17A to FIG. 17C illustrate block views showing exemplary operations of the symbol encoder having the coding rate of ¼ according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 18A illustrates a detailed block view of a ½ outer encoder according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 18B illustrates a detailed block view of a ¼ outer encoder according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 19( a) to FIG. 19( c) illustrate a variable length interleaving process of a symbol interleaver shown in FIG. 16;

FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B illustrate a block view showing a structure of a block processor according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 21( a) to FIG. 21( c) illustrate examples of block-encoding and trellis-encoding processes according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 22 illustrates a block view of a trellis encoding module according to an embodiment of present invention;

FIG. 23A and FIG. 23B illustrate a concatenation between a block processor and a trellis encoding module according to the present invention;

FIG. 24 illustrates a block view showing a structure of a block processor according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 25 illustrates a block view showing a structure of a block processor according to yet another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 26 illustrates an example wherein a group formatter inserts and transmits a transmission parameter according to the present invention;

FIG. 27 illustrates an example wherein a block processor inserts and transmits a transmission parameter according to the present invention;

FIG. 28 illustrates an example wherein a packet formatter inserts and transmits a transmission parameter according to the present invention;

FIG. 29 illustrates an example wherein a transmission parameter according to the present invention is inserted in a field synchronization segment region;

FIG. 30 illustrates a block diagram of a digital broadcast receiving system according to the present invention;

FIG. 31 illustrates a data structure showing an example of known data being periodically inserted in valid data according to the present invention;

FIG. 32 illustrates a flow chart showing a method of detecting positions of known data according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 33 illustrates a block diagram showing a structure of a demodulator of a digital broadcast receiving system shown in FIG. 30;

FIG. 34 illustrates a detailed block diagram of the demodulator according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 35 illustrates a block diagram of a frequency offset estimator according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 36 illustrates a block diagram of a known sequence detector (or known data detector) and an initial frequency offset estimator according to the present invention;

FIG. 37 illustrates a block diagram of a partial correlator shown in FIG. 36;

FIG. 38 illustrates a second example of the timing recovery unit according to the present invention;

FIG. 39( a) and FIG. 39( b) illustrate examples of calculating a correlation value between the known data and the received signal so as to detect timing error in a time domain;

FIG. 40( a) and FIG. 40( b) illustrate other examples of calculating a correlation value between the known data and the received signal so as to detect timing error in a time domain;

FIG. 41 illustrates an example of correlation values when a timing error exists;

FIG. 42 illustrates a detailed block view showing an example of a timing error detector detecting timing error in a time domain according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 43 illustrates an example of a timing error detector detecting timing frequency error according an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 44 illustrates an example of a timing error detector detecting timing frequency error according another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 45 illustrates a block diagram of a DC remover according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 46 illustrates an example of input sample data inputted to the DC estimator shown in FIG. 45;

FIG. 47 illustrates a block diagram of a DC remover according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 48 is a flow chart illustrating a channel equalization method according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 49 illustrates a block diagram of a channel equalizer according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 50 illustrates a block diagram of an example of a remaining carrier wave phase error estimator according to the present invention;

FIG. 51 illustrates a block diagram of a phase error detector of FIG. 49;

FIG. 52 illustrates a phase compensator of FIG. 49;

FIG. 53 illustrates a block diagram of a channel equalizer according to another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 54 illustrates a block diagram of a channel equalizer according to yet another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 55 illustrates a block diagram of a channel equalizer according to yet another embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 56 illustrates a block diagram of an example of a CIR estimator according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 57 illustrates a block diagram of an example of a block decoder according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 58 and FIG. 59 illustrate process steps of error correction decoding according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 60 illustrates another example of a digital broadcast receiving system according to the present invention.

FIG. 61 illustrates a block diagram showing an example of a transmission parameter detector shown in FIG. 60 detecting a transmission parameter;

FIG. 62 illustrates a block diagram showing an example of a transmission parameter detector shown in FIG. 60 detecting an SCCC mode;

FIG. 63 illustrates an example of extracting and outputting a group valid identifier according to the present invention;

FIG. 64 illustrates an example of extracting and outputting a burst valid identifier according to the present invention;

FIG. 65 illustrates an example of comparing actual on/off times and burst sections according to the present invention;

FIG. 66 illustrates a block diagram of a receiving system according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 67 illustrates a bit stream syntax for a VCT according to the present invention;

FIG. 68 illustrates a service_type field according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 69 illustrates a service location descriptor according to an embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 70 illustrates examples that may be assigned to the stream_type field according to the present invention;

FIG. 71 illustrates a bit stream syntax for an EIT according to the present invention; and

FIG. 72 illustrates a block diagram of a receiving system according to another embodiment of the present invention.

**Reference numerals of the essential parts in the drawings** 100: service multiplexer 110: controller 120, 130: PSI/PSIP generator 140: null packet generator 150: mobile service multiplexer 160: transport multiplexer 161: main service multiplexer 162: transport stream(TS) packet multiplexer 210: demultiplexer 220: packet jitter mitigator 230: pre-processor 240: packet multiplexer 250: post-processor 260: synchronization multiplexer 270: transmission unit

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION Object of the Invention Field of the Invention and Discussion of the Related Art

The present invention relates to a digital broadcasting system and method of processing data for transmitting and receiving digital broadcast programs.

The Vestigial Sideband (VSB) transmission mode, which is adopted as the standard for digital broadcasting in North America and the Republic of Korea, is a system using a single carrier method. Therefore, the receiving performance of the digital broadcast receiving system may be deteriorated in a poor channel environment. Particularly, since resistance to changes in channels and noise is more highly required when using portable and/or mobile broadcast receivers, the receiving performance may be even more deteriorated when transmitting mobile service data by the VSB transmission mode.

TECHNICAL TASKS TO BE ACHIEVED BY THE INVENTION

Accordingly, the present invention is to provide a digital broadcasting system and a method of processing data in the digital broadcasting system that are highly resistant to channel changes and noise.

The present invention is to provide a digital broadcasting system and a method of processing data in a digital broadcasting system that can enhance the receiving performance of a receiving system (or receiver) by having a transmitting system (or transmitter) perform additional encoding on mobile service data.

The present invention is to provide a digital broadcasting system and a method of processing data in the digital broadcasting system that can also enhance the receiving performance of a digital broadcast receiving system by inserting known data already known in accordance with a pre-agreement between the receiving system and the transmitting system in a predetermined region within a data region.

CONFIGURATION OF THE INVENTION

To achieve these objects, a transmitting system according to an embodiment of the present invention includes a service multiplexer and a transmitter. The service multiplexer multiplexes mobile service data and main service data at pre-determined data rates and, then, transmits the multiplexed service data to the transmitter. The transmitter performs additional encoding on the mobile service data transmitted from the service multiplexer and, also, groups a plurality of mobile service data packets having encoding performed thereon so as to configure a data group.

Herein, the transmitter may multiplex a mobile service data packet including the mobile service data and a main service data packet including the main service data in packet units and may transmit the multiplexed data packets to a digital broadcast receiving system. Herein, the transmitter may multiplex the data group and the main service data packet in a burst structure, wherein the burst section may be divided in a burst-on section including the data group, and a burst-off section that does not include the data group.

The data group may be divided into a plurality of regions based upon a degree of interference of the main service data. A long known data sequence may be periodically inserted in the region having no interference with the main service data.

In another aspect of the present invention, a receiving system may use the known data sequence for demodulating and channel equalizing processes.

When receiving only the mobile service data, the receiving system turns power on only during the burst-on section so as to process the mobile service data.

The objectives and other advantages of the invention may be realized and attained by the structure particularly pointed out in the written description hereof as well as the appended drawings.

Reference will now be made in detail to the preferred embodiments of the present invention, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings.

Definition of the Terms Used in the Present Invention

In addition, although the terms used in the present invention are selected from generally known and used terms, some of the terms mentioned in the description of the present invention have been selected by the applicant at his or her discretion, the detailed meanings of which are described in relevant parts of the description herein. Furthermore, it is required that the present invention is understood, not simply by the actual terms used but by the meaning of each term lying within.

Among the terms used in the description of the present invention, main service data correspond to data that can be received by a fixed receiving system and may include audio/video (A/V) data. More specifically, the main service data may include A/V data of high definition (HD) or standard definition (SD) levels and may also include diverse data types required for data broadcasting. Also, the known data correspond to data pre-known in accordance with a pre-arranged agreement between the receiving system and the transmitting system. Additionally, in the present invention, mobile service data may include at least one of mobile service data, pedestrian service data, and handheld service data, and are collectively referred to as mobile service data for simplicity. Herein, the mobile service data not only correspond to mobile/pedestrian/handheld service data (M/P/H service data) but may also include any type of service data with mobile or portable characteristics. Therefore, the mobile service data according to the present invention are not limited only to the M/P/H service data.

The above-described mobile service data may correspond to data having information, such as program execution files, stock information, and so on, and may also correspond to A/V data. Most particularly, being a type of service data for a portable or mobile terminal (or broadcast receiver), the mobile service data may correspond to A/V data having lower resolution and lower data rate as compared to the main service data. For example, if an A/V codec that is used for a conventional main service corresponds to a MPEG-2 codec, a MPEG-4 advanced video coding (AVC) or scalable video coding (SVC) having better image compression efficiency may be used as the A/V codec for the mobile service. Furthermore, any type of data may be transmitted as the mobile service data. For example, transport protocol expert group (TPEG) data for broadcasting real-time transportation information may be serviced as the main service data.

Also, a data service using the mobile service data may include weather forecast services, traffic information services, stock information services, viewer participation quiz programs, real-time polls & surveys, interactive education broadcast programs, gaming services, services providing information on synopsis, character, background music, and filming sites of soap operas or series, services providing information on past match scores and player profiles and achievements, and services providing information on product information and programs classified by service, medium, time, and theme enabling purchase orders to be processed. Herein, the present invention is not limited only to the services mentioned above. In the present invention, the transmitting system provides backward compatibility in the main service data so as to be received by the conventional receiving system. Herein, the main service data and the mobile service data are multiplexed to the same physical channel and then transmitted.

The transmitting system according to the present invention performs additional encoding on the mobile service data and inserts the data already known by the receiving system and transmitting system (i.e., known data), thereby transmitting the processed data. Therefore, when using the transmitting system according to the present invention, the receiving system may receive the mobile service data during a mobile state and may also receive the mobile service data with stability despite various distortion and noise occurring within the channel.

General Description of a Transmitting System

FIG. 1 illustrates a block diagram showing a general structure of a digital broadcast transmitting system according to an embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the digital broadcast transmitting includes a service multiplexer 100 and a transmitter 200. Herein, the service multiplexer 100 is located in the studio of each broadcast station, and the transmitter 200 is located in a site placed at a predetermined distance from the studio. The transmitter 200 may be located in a plurality of different locations. Also, for example, the plurality of transmitters may share the same frequency. And, in this case, the plurality of transmitters receives the same signal. Accordingly, in the receiving system, a channel equalizer may compensate signal distortion, which is caused by a reflected wave, so as to recover the original signal. In another example, the plurality of transmitters may have different frequencies with respect to the same channel.

A variety of methods may be used for data communication each of the transmitters, which are located in remote positions, and the service multiplexer. For example, an interface standard such as a synchronous serial interface for transport of MPEG-2 data (SMPTE-310M). In the SMPTE-310M interface standard, a constant data rate is decided as an output data rate of the service multiplexer. For example, in case of the 8 VSB mode, the output data rate is 19.39 Mbps, and, in case of the 16 VSB mode, the output data rate is 38.78 Mbps. Furthermore, in the conventional 8 VSB mode transmitting system, a transport stream (TS) packet having a data rate of approximately 19.39 Mbps may be transmitted through a single physical channel. Also, in the transmitting system according to the present invention provided with backward compatibility with the conventional transmitting system, additional encoding is performed on the mobile service data. Thereafter, the additionally encoded mobile service data are multiplexed with the main service data to a TS packet form, which is then transmitted. At this point, the data rate of the multiplexed TS packet is approximately 19.39 Mbps.

At this point, the service multiplexer 100 receives at least one type of mobile service data and program specific information (PSI)/program and system information protocol (PSIP) table data for each mobile service and encapsulates the received data to each transport stream (TS) packet. Also, the service multiplexer 100 receives at least one type of main service data and PSI/PSIP table data for each main service so as to encapsulate the received data to a TS packet. Subsequently, the TS packets are multiplexed according to a predetermined multiplexing rule and outputs the multiplexed packets to the transmitter 200.

Service Multiplexer

FIG. 2 illustrates a block diagram showing an example of the service multiplexer. The service multiplexer includes a controller 110 for controlling the overall operations of the service multiplexer, a PSI/PSIP generator 120 for the main service, a PSI/PSIP generator 130 for the mobile service, a null packet generator 140, a mobile service multiplexer 150, and a transport multiplexer 160. The transport multiplexer 160 may include a main service multiplexer 161 and a transport stream (TS) packet multiplexer 162. Referring to FIG. 2, at least one type of compression encoded main service data and the PSI/PSIP table data generated from the PSI/PSIP generator 120 for the main service are inputted to the main service multiplexer 161 of the transport multiplexer 160. The main service multiplexer 161 encapsulates each of the inputted main service data and PSI/PSIP table data to MPEG-2 TS packet forms. Then, the MPEG-2 TS packets are multiplexed and outputted to the TS packet multiplexer 162. Herein, the data packet being outputted from the main service multiplexer 161 will be referred to as a main service data packet for simplicity.

Also, at least one type of the compression encoded mobile service data and the PSI/PSIP table data generated from the PSI/PSIP generator 130 for the mobile service are inputted to the mobile service multiplexer 150. The mobile service multiplexer 150 encapsulates each of the inputted mobile service data and PSI/PSIP table data to MPEG-2 TS packet forms. Then, the MPEG-2 TS packets are multiplexed and outputted to the TS packet multiplexer 162. Herein, the data packet being outputted from the mobile service multiplexer 150 will be referred to as a mobile service data packet for simplicity. At this point, the transmitter 200 requires identification information in order to identify and process the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet. Herein, the identification information may use values pre-decided in accordance with an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system, or may be configured of a separate set of data, or may modify predetermined location values with in the corresponding data packet. As an example of the present invention, a different packet identifier (PID) may be assigned to identify each of the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet.

In another example, by modifying a synchronization data byte within a header of the mobile service data packet, the service data packet may be identified by using the synchronization data byte value of the corresponding service data packet. For example, the synchronization byte of the main service data packet directly outputs the value decided by the ISO/IEC13818-1 standard (i.e., 0x47) without any modification. The synchronization byte of the mobile service data packet modifies and outputs the value, thereby identifying the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet. Conversely, the synchronization byte of the main service data packet is modified and outputted, whereas the synchronization byte of the mobile service data packet is directly outputted without being modified, thereby enabling each of the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet to be identified.

A plurality of methods may be applied in the method of modifying the synchronization byte. For example, each bit of the synchronization byte may be inversed, or only partial bits of the synchronization byte may be inversed. As described above, any type of identification information may be used to identify the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited only to the example set forth in the description of the present invention.

Meanwhile, a transport multiplexer used in the conventional digital broadcasting system may be used as the transport multiplexer 160 according to the present invention. More specifically, in order to multiplex the mobile service data and the main service data and to transmit the multiplexed data, the data rate of the main service is limited to a data rate of (19.39-K) Mbps. Then, K Mbps, which corresponds to the remaining data rate, is assigned as the data rate of the mobile service. Thus, the transport multiplexer which is already being used may be used as it is without any modification. Herein, the transport multiplexer 160 multiplexes the main service data packet being outputted from the main service multiplexer 161 and the mobile service data packet being outputted from the mobile service multiplexer 150. Thereafter, the transport multiplexer 160 transmits the multiplexed data packets to the transmitter 200.

However, in some cases, the output data rate of the mobile service multiplexer 150 may not be equal to K Mbps. In this case, the mobile service multiplexer 150 multiplexes and outputs null data packets generated from the null packet generator 140 so that the output data rate can reach K Mbps. More specifically, in order to match the output data rate of the mobile service multiplexer 150 to a constant data rate, the null packet generator 140 generates null data packets, which are then outputted to the mobile service multiplexer 150. For example, when the service multiplexer 100 assigns K Mbps of the 19.39 Mbps to the mobile service data, and when the remaining (19.39-K) Mbps is, therefore, assigned to the main service data, the data rate of the mobile service data that are multiplexed by the service multiplexer 100 actually becomes lower than K Mbps. This is because, in case of the mobile service data, the pre-processor of the transmitting system performs additional encoding, thereby increasing the amount of data. Eventually, the data rate of the mobile service data, which may be transmitted from the service multiplexer 100, becomes smaller than K Mbps.

For example, since the pre-processor of the transmitter performs an encoding process on the mobile service data at a coding rate of at least ½, the amount of the data outputted from the pre-processor is increased to more than twice the amount of the data initially inputted to the pre-processor. Therefore, the sum of the data rate of the main service data and the data rate of the mobile service data, both being multiplexed by the service multiplexer 100, becomes either equal to or smaller than 19.39 Mbps. Therefore, in order to match the data rate of the data that are finally outputted from the service multiplexer 100 to a constant data rate (e.g., 19.39 Mbps), an amount of null data packets corresponding to the amount of lacking data rate is generated from the null packet generator 140 and outputted to the mobile service multiplexer 150.

Accordingly, the mobile service multiplexer 150 encapsulates each of the mobile service data and the PSI/PSIP table data that are being inputted to a MPEG-2 TS packet form. Then, the above-described TS packets are multiplexed with the null data packets and, then, outputted to the TS packet multiplexer 162. Thereafter, the TS packet multiplexer 162 multiplexes the main service data packet being outputted from the main service multiplexer 161 and the mobile service data packet being outputted from the mobile service multiplexer 150 and transmits the multiplexed data packets to the transmitter 200 at a data rate of 19.39 Mbps.

According to an embodiment of the present invention, the mobile service multiplexer 150 receives the null data packets. However, this is merely exemplary and does not limit the scope of the present invention. In other words, according to another embodiment of the present invention, the TS packet multiplexer 162 may receive the null data packets, so as to match the data rate of the finally outputted data to a constant data rate. Herein, the output path and multiplexing rule of the null data packet is controlled by the controller 110. The controller 110 controls the multiplexing processes performed by the mobile service multiplexer 150, the main service multiplexer 161 of the transport multiplexer 160, and the TS packet multiplexer 162, and also controls the null data packet generation of the null packet generator 140. At this point, the transmitter 200 discards (or deletes) the null data packets transmitted from the service multiplexer 100 instead of transmitting the null data packets.

Further, in order to allow the transmitter 200 to discard the null data packets transmitted from the service multiplexer 100 instead of transmitting them, identification information for identifying the null data packet is required. Herein, the identification information may use values pre-decided in accordance with an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system. For example, the value of the synchronization byte within the header of the null data packet may be modified so as to be used as the identification information. Alternatively, a transport_error_indicator flag may also be used as the identification information.

In the description of the present invention, an example of using the transport_error_indicator flag as the identification information will be given to describe an embodiment of the present invention. In this case, the transport_error_indicator flag of the null data packet is set to ‘1’, and the transport_error_indicator flag of the remaining data packets are reset to ‘0’, so as to identify the null data packet. More specifically, when the null packet generator 140 generates the null data packets, if the transport_error_indicator flag from the header field of the null data packet is set to ‘1’ and then transmitted, the null data packet may be identified and, therefore, be discarded. In the present invention, any type of identification information for identifying the null data packets may be used. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited only to the examples set forth in the description of the present invention.

According to another embodiment of the present invention, a transmission parameter may be included in at least a portion of the null data packet, or in at least one table or an operations and maintenance (OM) packet (or OMP) of the PSI/PSIP table for the mobile service. In this case, the transmitter 200 extracts the transmission parameter and outputs the extracted transmission parameter to the corresponding block and also transmits the extracted parameter to the receiving system if required. More specifically, a packet referred to as an OMP is defined for the purpose of operating and managing the transmitting system. For example, the OMP is configured in accordance with the MPEG-2 TS packet format, and the corresponding PID is given the value of 0x1FFA. The OMP is configured of a 4-byte header and a 184-byte payload. Herein, among the 184 bytes, the first byte corresponds to an OM_type field, which indicates the type of the OM packet.

In the present invention, the transmission parameter may be transmitted in the form of an OMP. And, in this case, among the values of the reserved fields within the OM_type field, a pre-arranged value is used, thereby indicating that the transmission parameter is being transmitted to the transmitter 200 in the form of an OMP. More specifically, the transmitter 200 may find (or identify) the OMP by referring to the PID. Also, by parsing the OM_type field within the OMP, the transmitter 200 can verify whether or not a transmission parameter is included after the OM_type field of the corresponding packet.

The transmission parameter corresponds to supplemental data required for processing mobile service data from the transmitting system and the receiving system. For example, the transmission parameter may include data group information, region information within the data group, RS frame information, super frame information, burst information, turbo code information, and RS code information. The burst information may include burst size information, burst period information, and time information to next burst. The burst period signifies the period at which the burst transmitting the same mobile service is repeated. The data group includes a plurality of mobile service data packets, and a plurality of such data groups is gathered (or grouped) to form a burst. A burst section signifies the beginning of a current burst to the beginning of a next burst. Herein, the burst section is classified as a section that includes the data group (also referred to as a burst-on section), and a section that does not include the data group (also referred to as a burst-off section). A burst-on section is configured of a plurality of fields, wherein one field includes one data group.

The transmission parameter may also include information on how signals of a symbol domain are encoded in order to transmit the mobile service data, and multiplexing information on how the main service data and the mobile service data or various types of mobile service data are multiplexed. The information included in the transmission parameter is merely exemplary to facilitate the understanding of the present invention. And, the adding and deleting of the information included in the transmission parameter may be easily modified and changed by anyone skilled in the art. Therefore, the present invention is not limited to the examples proposed in the description set forth herein.

Furthermore, the transmission parameters may be provided from the service multiplexer 100 to the transmitter 200. Alternatively, the transmission parameters may also be set up by an internal controller (not shown) within the transmitter 200 or received from an external source.

Transmitter

FIG. 3 illustrates a block diagram showing an example of the transmitter 200 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the transmitter 200 includes a demultiplexer 210, a packet jitter mitigator 220, a pre-processor 230, a packet multiplexer 240, a post-processor 250, a synchronization (sync) multiplexer 260, and a transmission unit 270. Herein, when a data packet is received from the service multiplexer 100, the demultiplexer 210 should identify whether the received data packet corresponds to a main service data packet, a mobile service data packet, or a null data packet. For example, the demultiplexer 210 uses the PID within the received data packet so as to identify the main service data packet and the mobile service data packet. Then, the demultiplexer 210 uses a transport_error_indicator field to identify the null data packet. The main service data packet identified by the demultiplexer 210 is outputted to the packet jitter mitigator 220, the mobile service data packet is outputted to the pre-processor 230, and the null data packet is discarded. If a transmission parameter is included in the null data packet, then the transmission parameter is first extracted and outputted to the corresponding block. Thereafter, the null data packet is discarded.

The pre-processor 230 performs an additional encoding process on the mobile service data included in the service data packet, which is demultiplexed and outputted from the demultiplexer 210. The pre-processor 230 also performs a process of configuring a data group so that the data group may be positioned at a specific place in accordance with the purpose of the data, which are to be transmitted on a transmission frame. This is to enable the mobile service data to respond swiftly and strongly against noise and channel changes. The pre-processor 230 may also refer to the transmission parameter when performing the additional encoding process. Also, the pre-processor 230 groups a plurality of mobile service data packets to configure a data group. Thereafter, known data, mobile service data, RS parity data, and MPEG header are allocated (or assigned) to pre-determined areas within the data group.

Pre-Processor within Transmitter

FIG. 4 illustrates a block diagram showing an example of the pre-processor 230 according to the present invention. The pre-processor 230 includes a data randomizer 301, a RS frame encoder 302, a block processor 303, a group formatter 304, a data deinterleaver 305, and a packet formatter 306. The data randomizer 301 within the above-described pre-processor 230 randomizes the mobile service data packet including the mobile service data that is inputted through the demultiplexer 210. Then, the data randomizer 301 outputs the randomized mobile service data packet to the RS frame encoder 302. At this point, since the data randomizer 301 performs the randomizing process on the mobile service data, the randomizing process that is to be performed by the data randomizer 251 of the post-processor 250 on the mobile service data may be omitted. The data randomizer 301 may also discard the synchronization byte within the mobile service data packet and perform the randomizing process. This is an option that may be chosen by the system designer. In the example given in the present invention, the randomizing process is performed without discarding the synchronization byte within the mobile service data packet.

The RS frame encoder 302 groups a plurality of synchronization bytes within the mobile service data packets that is randomized and inputted, so as to create a RS frame. Then, the RS frame encoder 302 performs at least one of an error correction encoding process and an error detection encoding process in RS frame units. Accordingly, robustness may be provided to the mobile service data, thereby scattering group error that may occur during changes in a frequency environment, thereby enabling the mobile service data to respond to the frequency environment, which is extremely vulnerable and liable to frequent changes. Also, the RS frame encoder 302 groups a plurality of RS frame so as to create a super frame, thereby performing a row permutation process in super frame units. The row permutation process may also be referred to as a row interleaving process. Hereinafter, the process will be referred to as row permutation for simplicity.

More specifically, when the RS frame encoder 302 performs the process of permuting each row of the super frame in accordance with a pre-determined rule, the position of the rows within the super frame before and after the row permutation process is changed. If the row permutation process is performed by super frame units, and even though the section having a plurality of errors occurring therein becomes very long, and even though the number of errors included in the RS frame, which is to be decoded, exceeds the extent of being able to be corrected, the errors become dispersed within the entire super frame. Thus, the decoding ability is even more enhanced as compared to a single RS frame.

At this point, as an example of the present invention, RS-encoding is applied for the error correction encoding process, and a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) encoding is applied for the error detection encoding process. When performing the RS-encoding process, parity data that are used for the error correction are generated. And, when performing the CRC encoding process, CRC data that are used for the error detection are generated. RS-encoding is one of forward error correction (FEC) methods. The FEC corresponds to a technique for compensating errors that occur during the transmission process. The CRC data generated by CRC encoding may be used for indicating whether or not the mobile service data have been damaged by the errors while being transmitted through the channel. In the present invention, a variety of error detection encoding methods other than the CRC encoding method may be used, or the error correction encoding method may be used to enhance the overall error correction ability of the receiving system. Herein, the RS frame encoder 302 refers to a pre-determined transmission parameter and/or the transmission parameter provided from the service multiplexer 100 so as to perform operations including RS frame configuration, RS encoding, CRC encoding, super frame configuration, and row permutation in super frame units.

RS Frame Encoder within Pre-Processor

FIG. 5( a) to FIG. 5( e) illustrate error correction encoding and error detection encoding processes according to an embodiment of the present invention. More specifically, the RS frame encoder 302 first divides the inputted mobile service data bytes to units of a predetermined length. The predetermined length is decided by the system designer. And, in the example of the present invention, the predetermined length is equal to 187 bytes, and, therefore, the 187-byte unit will be referred to as a packet for simplicity. For example, when the mobile service data that are being inputted, as shown in FIG. 5( a), correspond to a MPEG transport stream (TS) packet configured of 188-byte units, the first synchronization byte is removed, as shown in FIG. 5( b), so as to configure a 187-byte unit. Herein, the synchronization byte is removed because each mobile service data packet has the same value.

Herein, the process of removing the synchronization byte may be performed during a randomizing process of the data randomizer 301 in an earlier process. In this case, the process of the removing the synchronization byte by the RS frame encoder 302 may be omitted. Moreover, when adding synchronization bytes from the receiving system, the process may be performed by the data derandomizer instead of the RS frame decoder. Therefore, if a removable fixed byte (e.g., synchronization byte) does not exist within the mobile service data packet that is being inputted to the RS frame encoder 302, or if the mobile service data that are being inputted are not configured in a packet format, the mobile service data that are being inputted are divided into 187-byte units, thereby configuring a packet for each 187-byte unit.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5( c), N number of packets configured of 187 bytes is grouped to configure a RS frame. At this point, the RS frame is configured as a RS frame having the size of N(row)*187(column) bytes, in which 187-byte packets are sequentially inputted in a row direction. In order to simplify the description of the present invention, the RS frame configured as described above will also be referred to as a first RS frame. More specifically, only pure mobile service data are included in the first RS frame, which is the same as the structure configured of 187 N-byte rows. Thereafter, the mobile service data within the RS frame are divided into equal sizes. Then, when the divided mobile service data are transmitted in the same order as the input order for configuring the RS frame, and when one or more errors have occurred at a particular point during the transmitting/receiving process, the errors are clustered (or gathered) within the RS frame as well. In this case, the receiving system uses a RS erasure decoding method when performing error correction decoding, thereby enhancing the error correction ability. At this point, the N number of columns within the N number of RS frame includes 187 bytes, as shown in FIG. 5( c).

In this case, a (Nc,Kc)−RS encoding process is performed on each column, so as to generate Nc−Kc(=P) number of parity bytes. Then, the newly generated P number of parity bytes is added after the very last byte of the corresponding column, thereby creating a column of (187+P) bytes. Herein, as shown in FIG. 5( c), Kc is equal to 187 (i.e., Kc=187), and Nc is equal to 187+P (i.e., Nc=187+P). For example, when P is equal to 48, (235,187)-RS encoding process is performed so as to create a column of 235 bytes. When such RS encoding process is performed on all N number of columns, as shown in FIG. 5( c), a RS frame having the size of N(row)*(187+P) (column) bytes may be created, as shown in FIG. 5( d). In order to simplify the description of the present invention, the RS frame having the RS parity inserted therein will be referred to as second RS frame. More specifically, the second RS frame having the structure of (187+P) rows configured of N bytes may be configured.

As shown in FIG. 5( c) or FIG. 5( d), each row of the RS frame is configured of N bytes. However, depending upon channel conditions between the transmitting system and the receiving system, error may be included in the RS frame. When errors occur as described above, CRC data (or CRC code or CRC checksum) may be used on each row unit in order to verify whether error exists in each row unit. The RS frame encoder 302 may perform CRC encoding on the mobile service data being RS encoded so as to create (or generate) the CRC data. The CRC data being generated by CRC encoding may be used to indicate whether the mobile service data have been damaged while being transmitted through the channel.

The present invention may also use different error detection encoding methods other than the CRC encoding method. Alternatively, the present invention may use the error correction encoding method to enhance the overall error correction ability of the receiving system. FIG. 5( e) illustrates an example of using a 2-byte (i.e., 16-bit) CRC checksum as the CRC data. Herein, a 2-byte CRC checksum is generated for N number of bytes of each row, thereby adding the 2-byte CRC checksum at the end of the N number of bytes. Thus, each row is expanded to (N+2) number of bytes. Equation 1 below corresponds to an exemplary equation for generating a 2-byte CRC checksum for each row being configured of N number of bytes.

g(x)=x ¹⁶ +x ¹² +x ⁵+1  Equation 1

The process of adding a 2-byte checksum in each row is only exemplary. Therefore, the present invention is not limited only to the example proposed in the description set forth herein. In order to simplify the understanding of the present invention, the RS frame having the RS parity and CRC checksum added therein will hereinafter be referred to as a third RS frame. More specifically, the third RS frame corresponds to (187+P) number of rows each configured of (N+2) number of bytes. As described above, when the RS-encoding and CRC-encoding processes are completed, the (N*187)-byte RS frame is expanded to a (N+2)*(187+P)-byte RS frame.

Based upon an error correction scenario of a RS frame, the data bytes within the RS frame are transmitted through a channel in a row direction. At this point, when a large number of errors occur during a limited period of transmission time, errors also occur in a row direction within the RS frame being processed with a decoding process in the receiving system. However, in the perspective of RS encoding performed in a column direction, the errors are shown as being scattered. Therefore, error correction may be performed more effectively. At this point, a method of increasing the number of parity data bytes (P) may be used in order to perform a more intense error correction process. However, using this method may lead to a decrease in transmission efficiency. Therefore, a mutually advantageous method is required. Furthermore, when performing the decoding process, an erasure decoding process may be used to enhance the error correction performance.

The RS frame encoder according to the present invention also performs a row permutation (or interleaving) process in super frame units in order to further enhance the error correction performance when error correction the RS frame. FIG. 6 illustrates an example of performing a row permutation (or interleaving) process in super frame units according to the present invention. More specifically, G number of RS frames encoded as shown in FIG. 5 is grouped to form a super frame, as shown in FIG. 6( a). At this point, since each RS frame is formed of (N+2)*(187+P) number of bytes, one super frame is configured to have the size of (N+2)*(187+P)*G bytes.

When a row permutation process permuting each row of the super frame configured as described above is performed based upon a pre-determined permutation rule, the positions of the rows prior to and after being permuted (or interleaved) within the super frame may be altered. More specifically, the i^(th) row of the super frame prior to the interleaving process, as shown in FIG. 6( b), is positioned in the j^(th) row of the same super frame after the row permutation process. The above-described relation between i and j can be easily understood with reference to a permutation rule as shown in Equation 2 below.

j=G(i mod(187+P))+└i/(187+P)┘

i=(187+P)(j mod G)+└j/G┘

where 0≦i, j≦(187+P)G−1; or

where 0≦i, j<(187+P)G  Equation 2

Herein, each row of the super frame is configured of (N+2) number of data bytes even after being row-permuted in super frame units.

When all row permutation processes in super frame units are completed, the super frame is once again divided into G number of row-permuted RS frames, as shown in FIG. 6( d), and then provided to the block processor 303. Herein, the number of RS parity bytes and the number of columns should be equally provided in each of the RS frames, which configure a super frame. As described in the error correction scenario of a RS frame, in case of the super frame, a section having a large number of errors occurring therein is so long that, even when one RS frame that is to be decoded includes an excessive number of errors (i.e., to an extent that the errors cannot be corrected), such errors can be scattered throughout the entire super frame. Therefore, in comparison with a single RS frame, the decoding performance of the super frame is more enhanced.

As described above, the mobile service data being encoded in RS frame units and row-permuted in super frame units by the RS frame encoders 302 are outputted to the block processor 303. The block processor 303 then encodes the inputted mobile service data at a coding rate of D/E (wherein, D is smaller than E (i.e., D<E)) and then outputted to the group formatter 304. More specifically, the block processor 303 divides the mobile service data being inputted in byte units into bit units. Then, the D number of bits is encoded to E number of bits. Thereafter, the encoded bits are converted back to byte units and then outputted. For example, if 1 bit of the input data is encoded to 2 bits and outputted, then D is equal to 1 and E is equal to 2 (i.e., D=1 and E=2). Alternatively, if 1 bit of the input data is encoded to 4 bits and outputted, then D is equal to 1 and E is equal to 4 (i.e., D=1 and E=4). Hereinafter, the former coding rate will be referred to as a coding process at a rate of ½ (or a ½-rate coding process), and the latter coding rate will be referred to as a coding process at a rate of ¼ (or a ¼-rate coding process), for simplicity.

Herein, when using the ¼ coding rate, the coding efficiency is greater than when using the ½ coding rate, and may, therefore, provide greater and enhanced error correction ability. For such reason, when it is assumed that the data encoded at a ¼ coding rate in the group formatter 304, which is located at a later portion of the system, are assigned to a region which the receiving performance may be deteriorated, and that the data encoded at a ½ coding rate are assigned to a region having excellent receiving performance, the difference in performance may be reduced. At this point, the block processor 303 may also receive signaling information including transmission parameters. Herein, the signaling information may also be processed with either ½-rate coding or ¼-rate coding as described in the step of processing mobile service data. Thereafter, the signaling information is also considered to be the same as the mobile service data and processed accordingly.

Meanwhile, the group formatter 304 inserts mobile service data that are outputted from the block processor 303 in corresponding regions within a data group, which is configured in accordance with a pre-defined rule. Also, with respect to the data deinterleaving process, each place holder or known data (or known data place holders) are also inserted in corresponding regions within the data group. At this point, the data group may be divided into at least one hierarchical region. Herein, the type of mobile service data being inserted in each region may vary depending upon the characteristics of each hierarchical region. Additionally, each region may, for example, be divided based upon the receiving performance within the data group. Furthermore, one data group may be configured to include a set of field synchronization data.

In an example given in the present invention, a data group is divided into A, B, and C regions in a data configuration prior to data deinterleaving. At this point, the group formatter 304 assigns the mobile service data, which are inputted after being RS encoded and block encoded, to each of the corresponding regions by referring to the transmission parameter. FIG. 7A illustrates an alignment of data after being data interleaved and identified, and FIG. 7B illustrates an alignment of data before being data interleaved and identified. More specifically, a data structure identical to that shown in FIG. 7A is transmitted to a receiving system. Also, the data group configured to have the same structure as the data structure shown in FIG. 7A is inputted to the data deinterleaver 305.

As described above, FIG. 7A illustrates a data structure prior to data deinterleaving that is divided into 3 regions, such as region A, region B, and region C. Also, in the present invention, each of the regions A to C is further divided into a plurality of hierarchically lower regions. Referring to FIG. 7A, region A is divided into 5 sub-regions (A1 to A5), region B is divided into 2 sub-regions (B1 and B2), and region C is divided into 3 sub-regions (C1 to C3). Herein, regions A to C are identified as regions having similar receiving performances within the data group. Herein, the type of mobile service data, which are inputted, may also vary depending upon the characteristic of each region.

In the example of the present invention, the data structure is divided into regions A to C based upon the level of interference of the main service data. Herein, the data group is divided into a plurality of regions to be used for different purposes. More specifically, a region of the main service data having no interference or a very low interference level may be considered to have a more resistant (or stronger) receiving performance as compared to regions having higher interference levels. Additionally, when using a system inserting and transmitting known data in the data group, and when consecutively long known data are to be periodically inserted in the mobile service data, the known data having a predetermined length may be periodically inserted in the region having no interference from the main service data (e.g., region A). However, due to interference from the main service data, it is difficult to periodically insert known data and also to insert consecutively long known data to a region having interference from the main service data (e.g., region B and region C).

At this point, the data group includes a position in which a field synchronization signal is to be inserted. The group formatter 304 operates regardless of the insertion position of the field synchronization signal. And, the actual field synchronization signal is inserted in a field synchronization signal insertion position pre-defined by a synchronization multiplexer 260 in a later block. As a data structure prior to the data interleaving process, FIG. 7B illustrates an example of 118 segments being assigned to one data group. More specifically, the data group of FIG. 7B includes 38 segments before the field synchronization signal insertion position and 80 segments after the field synchronization signal insertion position.

Hereinafter, examples of allocating data to region A (A1 to A5), region B (B1 and B2), and region C (C1 to C3) will now be described in detail with reference to FIG. 7A. The data group size, the number of hierarchically divided regions within the data group and the size of each region, and the number of mobile service data bytes that can be inserted in each hierarchically divided region of FIG. 7A are merely examples given to facilitate the understanding of the present invention. Herein, the group formatter 304 creates a data group including places in which field synchronization data bytes are to be inserted, so as to create the data group that will hereinafter be described in detail.

More specifically, region A is a region within the data group in which a long known data sequence may be periodically inserted, and in which includes regions wherein the main service data are not mixed (e.g., A2 to A5). Also, region A includes a region (e.g., A1) located between a field synchronization region and the region in which the first known data sequence is to be inserted. For example, referring to FIG. 7A, 2428 bytes of the mobile service data may be inserted in sub-region A1, 2580 bytes may be inserted in sub-region A2, 2772 bytes may be inserted in sub-region A3, 2472 bytes may be inserted in sub-region A4, and 2772 bytes may be inserted in sub-region A5. Herein, trellis initialization data or known data, MPEG header, and RS parity are not included in the mobile service data. As described above, when region A includes a known data sequence at both ends, the receiving system uses channel information that can obtain known data or field synchronization data, so as to perform equalization, thereby providing enforced equalization performance.

Also, region B includes a region located within 8 segments at the beginning of a field synchronization region within the data group (chronologically placed before sub-region A1) (e.g., sub-region B1), and a region located within 8 segments behind the very last known data sequence which is inserted in the data group (chronologically placed after region A) (e.g., sub-region B2). For example, 930 bytes of the mobile service data may be inserted in the sub-region B1, and 1350 bytes may be inserted in sub-region B2. Similarly, trellis initialization data or known data, MPEG header, and RS parity are not included in the mobile service data. In case of region B, the receiving system may perform equalization by using channel information obtained from the field synchronization region. Alternatively, the receiving system may also perform equalization by using channel information that may be obtained from the last known data sequence, thereby enabling the system to respond to the channel changes.

Region C includes a region located within 30 segments including and preceding the 9^(th) segment of the field synchronization region (chronologically located before region A) (e.g., sub-region C1), a region located within 12 segments including and following the 9^(th) segment of the very last known data sequence within the data group (chronologically located after region A) (e.g., sub-region C2), and a region located in 32 segments after the sub-region C2 (e.g., sub-region C3). For example, 1272 bytes of the mobile service data may be inserted in the sub-region C1, 1560 bytes may be inserted in sub-region C2, and 1312 bytes may be inserted in sub-region C3. Similarly, trellis initialization data or known data, MPEG header, and RS parity are not included in the mobile service data.

Herein, sub-region C1 is located chronologically earlier than (or before) region A. And, since sub-region C1 is located further apart from the field synchronization region which corresponds to the closest known data region, the receiving system may use the channel information obtained from the field synchronization data when performing channel equalization. Alternatively, the receiving system may also use the most recent channel information of a previous data group. Furthermore, in sub-region C2 and sub-region C3 located chronologically after region A, the receiving system may use the channel information obtained from the last known data sequence to perform equalization. However, when the channels are subject to fast and frequent changes, the equalization may not be performed perfectly. Therefore, the equalization performance of region C may be deteriorated as compared to that of region B.

When it is assumed that the data group is allocated with a plurality of hierarchically divided regions, as described above, the block processor 303 may encode the mobile service data, which are to be inserted to each region based upon the characteristic of each hierarchical region, at a different coding rate. For example, the block processor 303 may encode the mobile service data, which are to be inserted in sub-regions A1 to A5 of region A, at a coding rate of ½. Then, the group formatter 304 may insert the ½-rate encoded mobile service data to sub-regions A1 to A5.

The block processor 303 may encode the mobile service data, which are to be inserted in regions B1 and B2 of region B, at a coding rate of ¼ having higher error correction ability as compared to the ½-coding rate. Then, the group formatter 304 inserts the ¼-rate coded mobile service data in sub-region B1 and sub-region B2. Furthermore, the block processor 303 may encode the mobile service data, which are to be inserted in sub-regions C1 to C3 of region C, at a coding rate of ¼ or a coding rate having higher error correction ability than the ¼-coding rate. Then, the group formatter 304 may either insert the encoded mobile service data to sub-regions C1 to C3, as described above, or leave the data in a reserved region for future usage.

In addition, the group formatter 304 also inserts supplemental data, such as signaling information that notifies the overall transmission information, other than the mobile service data in the data group. Also, apart from the encoded mobile service data outputted from the block processor 303, the group formatter 304 also inserts MPEG header place holders, non-systematic RS parity place holders, main service data place holders, which are related to data deinterleaving in a later process, as shown in FIG. 7A. Herein, the main service data place holders are inserted because the mobile service data bytes and the main service data bytes are alternately mixed with one another in regions B and C based upon the input of the data deinterleaver, as shown in FIG. 7A. For example, based upon the data outputted after data deinterleaving, the place holder for the MPEG header may be allocated at the very beginning of each packet.

Furthermore, the group formatter 304 either inserts known data generated in accordance with a pre-determined method or inserts known data place holders for inserting the known data in a later process. Additionally, place holders for initializing the trellis encoding module 256 are also inserted in the corresponding regions (i.e., red region). According to an embodiment of the present invention, the initialization data place holders may be inserted in the beginning of the known data sequence. For example, in the data structure shown in FIG. 7A, five known data regions (i.e., blue region) are assigned to region A within the data group, in order to insert the known data or known data place holders. Hereinafter, each of the five known data regions will be respectively referred to as a first known data region, a second known data region, a third known data region, a fourth known data region, and a fifth known data region, for simplicity.

Herein, at least one of the first to fifth known data regions (e.g., the first known data region) includes an identical pattern that is repeated at least two times within the known data. The repeating known data pattern will hereinafter be referred to as a first known data pattern for simplicity. The first known data pattern may be used by the receiving system for the acquisition of an initial carrier wave frequency synchronization signal, or the first known data pattern may be used for estimating a field synchronization signal position or a position of another known data region. Known data sequences having the same pattern are included in each of the first to fifth known data region. And, in order to be differentiated from the first known data patterns, the pattern will be referred to as a second known data pattern. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the first known data pattern and the second known data pattern have different lengths.

The length of the known data sequence of the second known data pattern may be either be equal to or different from the length of the entire known data sequence of the corresponding known data region. Alternatively, the length of the entire known data sequence is longer than the known data sequence of the second known data pattern, and the second known data pattern is included in the entire known data sequence. In the example of the present invention, 1424 symbols (i.e., 356 bytes) are inserted in each of the first to fifth known data regions as the second known data pattern. The second known data pattern that is inserted in the first to fifth known data region may be used by the receiving system as a training sequence or may be used for estimating a channel impulse response (CIR).

Furthermore, apart from the mobile service data, the group formatter 304 may also insert additional information, such as signaling information that notifies overall transmission information, in the data group. A transmission parameter associated with the transmission and reception of broadcast signals may be determined as the signaling information. Herein, the size of the mobile service data that can be inserted in a data group may vary in accordance with the sizes of the trellis initialization place holders or known data (or known data place holders), MPEG header place holders, and RS parity place holders.

FIG. 8 illustrates a part of data region A of the signal frame shown in FIG. 7A. Most particularly, FIG. 8 illustrates an expanded view from the field synchronization segment to the third known data region. The data frame of FIG. 8 indicates in symbol units the data bytes that are inserted in each region and outputted. Herein, 1 byte is configured of 4 symbols, and 1 symbol in configured of 2 bits. In the data frame shown in FIG. 8, the field synchronization segment is configured of 832 symbols. Herein, known data sequences may be included in part of the 832 symbols.

Each known data region includes an initialization data region (i.e., red region) that transmits the trellis memory initialization data. For example, 48 symbols may be assigned to the initialization data region. At this point, the initialization data required for initializing one of the 12 trellis encoders correspond to 2 symbols. Accordingly, 24 symbols will be required for initializing all 12 trellis encoders. Therefore, the remaining 24 symbols within the initialization data region of each known data region may be used as known data. Also, at least one of the first to fifth known data region (e.g., first known data region) includes the first known data pattern, and each of the first to fifth known data region includes the second known data pattern. The second known data pattern may either be included immediately after the trellis memory initialization data within the corresponding known data region or be included after the known data sequence of a different pattern. This is to enable the second known data patterns to maintain equal intervals, even though the starting point of the first to fifth known data regions and the lengths of the first to fifth known data regions are different from one another.

The first known data region positioned after approximately 16 segments from the field synchronization segment includes a trellis memory initialization data region (i.e., red region), a third known data pattern region (i.e., diagonally striped blue region), a second known data pattern region (i.e., CIR TS region), a fourth known data pattern region (i.e., reserved TS region), and a first known data pattern region (i.e., ACQ TS region). For example, the trellis memory initialization data region (i.e., red region) corresponds to a region having 24 symbols assigned thereto and having a trellis memory initialization process performed thereon by the transmitting system. The third known data pattern region (i.e., diagonally striped blue region) corresponds to a region assigned in reserve so as to enable the second known data pattern to maintain the same interval as the second known data pattern of another known data region. A third known data pattern included in the third known data pattern region may either be used by the receiving system or be left in reserve for future usage.

Also, in the second known data pattern region (i.e., CIR TS region), 1424 symbols are assigned, and a second known data pattern that can be used for channel equalization is inserted. The starting point within the segment of the second known data pattern region is the same for all known data regions. Furthermore, 252 symbols are assigned to the fourth known data pattern region (i.e., reserved TS region). According to the embodiment of the present invention, a transmission parameter is inserted in the fourth known data pattern region and then transmitted. For example, a mode information indicating the data rate of each region within the data group may be inserted. Herein, the mode indicating the data rate of each region within the data group will be referred to as serial concatenated convolution code (SCCC) for simplicity. For example, when a SCCC mode information having six different patterns is transmitted as a transmission (i.e., as signaling information) and inserted in the fourth known data pattern region, prior to performing the decoding process according to the SCCC mode, the receiving system may acquire information on the SCCC mode from the fourth known data pattern region, so as to decode the received signal. Examples of the SCCC mode are shown in Table 1 below.

TABLE 1 SCCC Coding Rate of SCCC Mode Region A Region B Region C 0 ½ ½ ½ 1 ½ ½ ¼ 2 ½ ¼ ½ 3 ½ ¼ ¼ 4 ¼ ¼ ½ 5 ¼ ¼ ¼

For example, when the SCCC mode value that is extracted from the fourth known data pattern region is equal to ‘2’, this indicates that region A and region C within the corresponding data group are encoded at a coding rate of ½ and that region B is encoded at a coding rate of ¼. The transmitting system of the present invention generates 6 patterns corresponding to each mode value shown in Table 1 based upon an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system. Herein, the corresponding pattern may be inserted in the fourth known data pattern region for each data group. In this case, the block decoder 1005 of the receiving system may obtain the SCCC mode information from the fourth known data pattern region prior to performing a decoding process in accordance with the corresponding SCCC mode.

Meanwhile, in order to acquire an initial carrier wave frequency synchronization signal, a plurality of first known data patterns are sequentially inserted in the first known data pattern region (i.e., ACQ TS region) of the first known data region. For example, one first known data pattern is assigned to 576 symbols. Therefore, a plurality of the first known data pattern of 576 symbols used for the acquisition of the initial carrier wave frequency synchronization signal, shown in FIG. 8, are sequentially inserted in the first known data pattern region.

A second known data region positioned after approximately 16 segments from the first known data region includes a trellis memory initialization data region (i.e., red region), a third known data pattern region (i.e., diagonally striped blue region), and a second known data pattern region (i.e., CIR TS region). For example, the trellis memory initialization data region (i.e., red region) of the second known data region corresponds to a region having 24 symbols assigned thereto and having data used for the initialization of the trellis memory inserted therein. The third known data pattern region (i.e., diagonally striped blue region) corresponds to a region assigned in reserve so as to enable the second known data pattern to maintain the same interval as the second known data pattern of another known data region. A third known data pattern included in the third known data pattern region may either be used by the receiving system or be left in reserve for future usage. Also, in the second known data pattern region (i.e., CIR TS region), 1424 symbols are assigned, and a second known data pattern that can be used for channel equalization is inserted. The starting point within the segment of the second known data pattern region is the same for all known data regions.

A third known data region positioned after approximately 16 segments from the second known data region includes a trellis memory initialization data region (i.e., red region), and a second known data pattern region (i.e., CIR TS region). The trellis memory initialization data region (i.e., red region) within the third known data region includes 12 bytes. Herein, for each byte, only 2 symbols are used for the initialization of the trellis memory. Therefore, the remaining 2 symbols within each byte (i.e., the remaining 24 symbols of the trellis memory initialization data region) may be used for channel equalization.

In the above-described data structure, 11892 symbols of general data may be inserted between the field synchronization region and the first known data region, thereby being transmitted. 10480 symbols of general data may be inserted between the first known data region and the second known data region, thereby being transmitted. And, 11888 symbols of general data may be inserted between the second known data region and the third known data region, thereby being transmitted. The general data corresponds to the remaining data excluding the data of the field synchronization and known data regions. For example, the general data correspond to the main service data, the mobile service data, the RS parity data, the MPEG header data, and so on.

FIGS. 9( a) to 9(c) illustrate a data structure (arrangement) of transmission (Tx) parameters included in a mobile service data region as signaling data. FIG. 9( a) illustrates signaling data having a length of 4 bytes. The signaling data include various information specifying a service identifier (ID) with respect to a program, an RS mode for regions A and B shown in FIG. 7A, an RS mode for region C shown in FIG. 7A, a super frame size (SFS), a permuted frame index (PFI) indicating a location of an RS frame in a super frame, a burst size, a group index (G1) indicating an index of a data group, and a time to a next burst (TNB). FIG. 9( a) illustrates an example of the above-described information being assigned to have the size of 4 bytes, and the size of each information are indicated in an array order within parentheses.

FIGS. 9( b) and 9(c) illustrate signal arrangements, when the signaling data of FIG. 9( a) are positioned in the signal frame shown in FIG. 7A. If an error correction mode for region A in the signal frame is a ½ rate SCCC mode (hereinafter, error correction mode 1), region A may include a first data region having 4-byte signaling data, a second data region having 4-byte duplicated signaling data, and a third data region having 24-byte RS parity data, as shown in FIG. 9( b). Alternatively, if the error correction mode for region A is a ¼ rate SCCC mode (hereinafter, error correction mode 2), region A may include a first data region having 4-byte signaling data and a second data region having 12-byte RS parity data, as shown in FIG. 9( c).

FIG. 10 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of the signaling data shown in FIG. 9 being inserted in a data group. The signaling data shown in FIG. 9 may be multiplexed with mobile service data in region A. FIG. 10 illustrates exemplary positions of the signaling information, when the multiplexed mobile service data and signaling information are interleaved by the data interleaver included in the transmitting system. If mobile service data including the transmission parameters shown in FIG. 9( b) are encoded in error correction mode 1 (i.e., at a ½-coding rate) and interleaved, among the 32 data bytes of FIG. 9( b), 6 bytes may be placed in sub-region A1 (i.e., between the field synchronization region and the first known data region), and 8 bytes may be placed in sub-region A2 (i.e., between the first known data region and the second known data region). Also, among the 32 data bytes of FIG. 9( b), 6 bytes of transmission parameters (e.g., including the RS parity data of the transmission parameters) may be placed in sub-regions A3, A4, and A5, respectively. On the other hand, if mobile service data including the 16-byte data shown in FIG. 9( c) are encoded in error correction mode 2 (i.e., at a ¼-coding rate), 3 bytes may be placed in sub-region A1 (i.e., between the field synchronization region and the first known data region), and 4 bytes may be placed in sub-region A2 (i.e., between the first known data region and the second known data region). Then, 3 bytes of transmission parameters (e.g., including the RS parity data of the transmission parameters) may be placed in sub-regions A3, A4, and A5, respectively.

In a broadcasting system, the broadcast receiving system can obtain the transmission parameters from the mobile service data by protocol with a broadcast transmitting system. And, prior to a decoding process based upon an SCCC mode, the receiving system may acquire (or obtain) signaling information predetermined in the known data region or field synchronization region shown in FIG. 8. Furthermore, the receiving system may also acquire (or obtain) burst information from the signaling information shown in FIG. 9, thereby receiving only the signals included in the corresponding burst.

Meanwhile, the output of the group formatter 304 is inputted to the data deinterleaver 305. And, the data deinterleaver 305 deinterleaves data by performing an inverse process of the data interleaver on the data and data place holders within the data group, which are then outputted to the packet formatter 306. More specifically, when the data and data place holders within the data group configured, as shown in FIG. 7A, are deinterleaved by the data deinterleaver 305, the data group being outputted to the packet formatter 306 is configured to have the structure shown in FIG. 7B.

The packet formatter 306 removes the main service data place holders and the RS parity place holders that were previously assigned for the deinterleaving process from the deinterleaved data being inputted. Then, the packet formatter 306 groups the remaining portion and replaces the 4-byte MPEG header place holder with an MPEG header having a null packet PID (or an unused PID from the main service data packet). Also, when the group formatter 304 inserts known data place holders, the packet formatter 306 may insert actual known data in the known data place holders, or may directly output the known data place holders without any modification in order to make replacement insertion in a later process. Thereafter, the packet formatter 306 identifies the data within the packet-formatted data group, as described above, as a 188-byte unit mobile service data packet (i.e., MPEG TS packet), which is then provided to the packet multiplexer 240.

The packet multiplexer 240 multiplexes the mobile service data packet outputted from the pre-processor 230 and the main service data packet outputted from the packet jitter mitigator 220 in accordance with a pre-defined multiplexing method. Then, the packet multiplexer 240 outputs the multiplexed data packets to the data randomizer 251 of the post-processor 250. Herein, the multiplexing method may vary in accordance with various variables of the system design. One of the multiplexing methods of the packet formatter 240 consists of providing a burst section along a time axis, and, then, transmitting a plurality of data groups during a burst-on section within the burst section, and transmitting only the main service data during the burst-off section within the burst section. Herein, the burst section indicates the section starting from the beginning of the current burst until the beginning of the next burst.

At this point, the main service data may be transmitted during the burst-on section. The packet multiplexer 240 refers to the transmission parameter, such as information on the burst size or the burst period, so as to be informed of the number of data groups and the period of the data groups included in a single burst. Herein, the mobile service data and the main service data may co-exist in the burst-on section, and only the main service data may exist in the burst-off section. Therefore, a main data service section transmitting the main service data may exist in both burst-on and burst-off sections. At this point, the main data service section within the burst-on section and the number of main service data packets included in the burst-off section may either be different from one another or be the same.

When the mobile service data are transmitted in a burst structure, the receiving system receiving only the mobile service data turns the power on only during the burst section, thereby receiving the corresponding data. Alternatively, in the section transmitting only the main service data, the power is turned off so that the main service data are not received in this section. Thus, the power consumption of the receiving system may be reduced. Such characteristic is advantageous in mobile or portable receivers that require low power consumption.

FIGS. 11( a) and 11(b) illustrate examples of acquiring mobile service data included in a particular data group within a burst according to the present invention. Referring to FIG. 11, the data group is configured of a plurality of consecutive mobile service data packets. And, a plurality of data groups are grouped to form a burst-on section. For simplicity, it will be assumed that a burst-on section of FIGS. 11( a) and 11(b) includes a program associated with a particular service. Referring to FIGS. 11( a) and 11(b), a time to next burst (TNB) indicates the time from each data group within a current burst (burst 1) to the starting point of the next burst (burst 2).

According to the present invention, the TNB is inserted and transmitted in each data group of the current burst. Then, the TNB is inserted in a pre-decided region within the data group. For example, the TNB information may be inserted in the fourth known data pattern region of the first known data region as signaling information, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9. As shown in FIG. 11( a), the TNB may gradually decrease from data group G1 of the current burst (burst 1) to G2 and G3 (i.e., TNBG1>TNBG2>TNBG3). At this point, the TNB is repeatedly inserted in each data group so that the TNB can be known by receiving other data groups even when an error occurs during the reception of a specific data group in the receiving system.

FIGS. 12( a) to 12(c) illustrate other examples of acquiring mobile service data included in a particular data group within a burst according to the present invention. Referring to FIGS. 12( a) to 12(c), two types of mobile service data are multiplexed with main service data packets. As shown in FIGS. 12( a) to 12(c), a first mobile service providing mobile service data will be indicated as “mo1”, and a second mobile service providing mobile service data will be indicated as “mo2”. More specifically, each of mo1 and mo2 signifies a data group of the first mobile service and a data group of the second mobile service, respectively. As shown in FIG. 12, each the data (mo1) of the first mobile service and the data (mo2) of the second mobile service are multiplexed and outputted in data group units. Herein, the burst section may be independently applied for each mobile service type. More specifically, among the data groups G1, G2, G3, and G4, G1 and G3 correspond to the data group of the first mobile service, and G2 and G4 correspond to the data group of the second mobile service. Therefore, the burst section of the first mobile service starts from the starting point of G1 and ends at the ending point of G3. And, the burst section of the second mobile service starts from the starting point of G2 and ends at the ending point of G4.

In other words, the TNBs respectively inserted in data groups G1 and G3 of the first mobile service (i.e., TNBG1 and TNBG3) indicate the time to the starting point of the next first mobile service. And, the TNBs respectively inserted in data groups G2 and G4 of the second mobile service (i.e., TNBG2 and TNBG4) indicate the time to the starting point of the next second mobile service. Also, various types of transmission parameters, such as the time to next burst (TNB), the length of each data group, the time to a current group to the next group within a burst, and the burst length, may either be given pre-decided values or be given values that may vary in real-time. For example, the transmission parameters may be inserted in the fourth known data pattern region of the first known data region as signaling information, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9.

Detailed Embodiments of the RS Frame Structure and Packet Multiplexing

Hereinafter, detailed embodiments of the pre-processor 230 and the packet multiplexer 240 will now be described. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the N value corresponding to the length of a row, which is included in the RS frame that is configured by the RS frame encoder 302, is set to 538. Accordingly, the RS frame encoder 302 receives 538 transport stream (TS) packets so as to configure a first RS frame having the size of 538*187 bytes. Thereafter, as described above, the first RS frame is processed with a (235,187)-RS encoding process so as to configure a second RS frame having the size of 538*235 bytes. Finally, the second RS frame is processed with generating a 16-bit checksum so as to configure a third RS frame having the sizes of 540*235.

For example, it is assumed that the mobile service data that are to be inserted in sub-regions A1 to A5 within region A are encoded at a coding rate of ½ by the block processor 303, and that the mobile service data that are to be inserted in sub-regions B1 and B2 within region B are encoded at a coding rate of ¼ by the block processor 303. It is also assumed that the mobile service data being inserted to regions A and B correspond to the same type of mobile service data.

Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 7A, the sum of the number of bytes of sub-regions A1 to A5 of region A, in which ½-rate encoded mobile service data are to be inserted, among the plurality of regions within the data group is equal to 13024 bytes (=2428+2580+2772+2472+2772 bytes). Herein, the number of byte prior to performing the ½-rate encoding process is equal to 6512 (=13024/2). On the other hand, the sum of the number of bytes of sub-regions B1 and B2 of region B, in which ¼-rate encoded mobile service data are to be inserted, among the plurality of regions within the data group is equal to 2280 bytes (=930+1350 bytes). Herein, the number of byte prior to performing the ¼-rate encoding process is equal to 570 (=2280/4).

In other words, when 7082 bytes of mobile service data are inputted to the block processor 303, 6512 byte are expanded to 13024 bytes by being ½-rate encoded, and 570 bytes are expanded to 2280 bytes by being ¼-rate encoded. Thereafter, the block processor 303 inserts the mobile service data expanded to 13024 bytes in sub-regions A1 to A5 of region A and, also, inserts the mobile service data expanded to 2280 bytes in sub-regions B1 and B2 of region B. Herein, the 7082 bytes of mobile service data being inputted to the block processor 303 may be divided into output data of the RS frame encoder 302 and signaling information. In the present invention, among the 7082 bytes of mobile service data, 7050 bytes correspond to the output data of the RS frame encoder 302, and the remaining 32 bytes correspond to the signaling information data. Then, ½-rate encoding or ¼-rate encoding is performed on the corresponding data bytes.

Meanwhile, a RS frame being processed with RS encoding and CRC encoding from the RS frame encoder 302 is configured of 540*235 bytes, in other words, 126900 bytes. The 126900 bytes are divided by 7050-byte units along the time axis, so as to produce 18 7050-byte units. Thereafter, a 32-byte unit of signaling information data is added to the 7050-byte unit mobile service data being outputted from the RS frame encoder 302. Subsequently, the RS frame encoder 302 performs ½-rate encoding or ¼-rate encoding on the corresponding data bytes, which are then outputted to the group formatter 304. Accordingly, the group formatter 304 inserts the ½-rate encoded data in region A and the ¼-rate encoded data in region B.

The process of deciding an N value that is required for configuring the RS frame from the RS frame encoder 302 will now be described in detail. More specifically, the size of the final RS frame (i.e., the third RS frame), which is RS encoded and CRC encoded from the RS frame encoder 302, which corresponds to (N+2)*235 bytes should be assigned to X number of groups, wherein X is an integer. Herein, in a single data group, 7050 data bytes prior to being encoded are allocated. Therefore, if the (N+2)*235 bytes are set to be the exact multiple of 7050(=30*235), the output data of the RS frame encoder 302 may be efficiently allocated to the data group. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the value of N is decided so that (N+2) becomes a multiple of 30. For example, in the present invention, N is equal to 538, and (N+2) (=540) divided by 30 is equal to 18. This indicates that the mobile service data within one RS frame are processed with either ½-rate encoding or ¼-rate encoding. The encoded mobile service data are then allocated to 18 data groups.

FIG. 13 illustrates a process of dividing the RS frame according to the present invention. More specifically, the RS frame having the size of (N+2)*235 is divided into 30*235 byte blocks. Then, the divided blocks are mapped to a single group. In other words, the data of a block having the size of 30*235 bytes are processed with one of a ½-rate encoding process and a ¼-rate encoding process and are, then, inserted in a data group.

In another example, it is assumed that the mobile service data that are to be inserted in region C are ½-rate encoded by the block processor 303, and that the mobile service data that are to be inserted in region C correspond to a mobile service data type different from that of the mobile service data that are inserted in regions A and B. In this case, as shown in FIG. 7A, the total number of ½-rate encoded mobile service data bytes that are to be included in sub-regions C1 to C3 of region C is equal to 4144 bytes (i.e., 4144=1272+1560+1312). In this case, the total number of mobile service data bytes prior to being ½-rate encoded is equal to 2072 bytes (i.e., 2072=4144/2). At this point, when it is assumed that 18 data groups are grouped to form a RS frame, and that the mobile service data of the RS frame are inserted into the region C, the RS frame is configured of 37296 bytes. Herein, the number of RS parity bytes P is set to be equal to 36 (i.e., P=36), and 2 CRC checksums are set to be included for each row. Accordingly, a total of 165 188-byte mobile service data packets may be transmitted for each RS frame.

In this case, 55 bytes may remain for each RS frame of the region C within the data group. Remaining data bytes may occur, when dividing each RS frame into a plurality of data groups having the same size. More specifically, remaining data bytes may occur in particular regions in each RS frame depending upon the size of the RS frames, the size and number of divided data groups, the number of mobile service data bytes that may be inserted into each data group, the coding rate of the corresponding region, the number of RS parity bytes, whether or not a CRC checksum has been allocated, and, if any, the number of CRC checksums allocated.

When dividing the RS frame into a plurality of data groups having the same size, and when remaining data bytes occur in the corresponding RS frame, K number of dummy bytes are added to the corresponding RS frame, wherein K is equal to the number of remaining data bytes within the RS frame. Then, the dummy byte-added RS frame is divided into a plurality of data groups. This process is illustrated in FIG. 14. More specifically, FIG. 14 illustrates an example of processing K number of remaining data bytes, which are produced by dividing the RS frame having the size of (N+2)*(187+P) bytes into M number of data groups having equal sizes. In this case, as shown in FIG. 14( a), K number of dummy bytes are added to the RS frame having the size of (N+2)*(187+P) bytes. Subsequently, the RS frame is read in row units, thereby being divided into M number of data groups, as shown in FIG. 14( b). At this point, each data group has the size of NoBytesPerGrp bytes. This may be described by Equation 3 shown below.

M×NoBytesPeGrp=(N+2)×(187+P)×K  Equation 3

Herein, NoBytesPerGrp indicates the number of bytes allocated for each group (i.e., the Number of Bytes Per Group). More specifically, the size corresponding to the number of bytes in one RS frame+K bytes is equal to the size of the M number of data groups.

When the mobile service data are transmitted by using the above-described method and transmission mode, the data randomizer 301 of the pre-processor 230 may receive the mobile service data packets through a first mobile service data path and a second mobile service data path, to which data that are to be assigned to regions A and B are inputted. More specifically, 538 data packets are inputted to the first mobile service data path, and 165 data packets are inputted to the second mobile service data path. In order to do so, a plurality of data randomizers and RS frame encoders may be provided. Accordingly, the 538 data packets being inputted to the first mobile service data path and the 165 data packets being inputted to the second mobile service data path are randomized by each respective data randomizer. Then, each RS frame encoder performs RS frame unit encoding and super frame unit row permutation processes on the inputted data packets. Thereafter, the processed data packets are divided back to RS frame units, thereby being inputted to the block processor 303.

For example, the RS frame encoder encoding the data being inputted through the first mobile service data path adds 48 parity bytes in a column direction to the corresponding RS frame. This RS frame encoder also adds a 2-byte CRC checksum in a row direction to the corresponding RS frame. The RS frame encoder encoding the data being inputted through the second mobile service data path adds 36 parity bytes in a column direction to the corresponding RS frame. This RS frame encoder also adds a 2-byte CRC checksum in a row direction to the corresponding RS frame.

The block processor 303 performs ½-rate encoding on the data that are to be assigned to regions A and C. And, the block processor 303 performs ¼-rate encoding on the data that are to be assigned to region B. The block processor 303 then outputs the encoded data to the group formatter 304.

At this point, since 55 bytes remain in region C included in the data group for each RS frame, as described above, the block processor 303 adds 55 dummy bytes to region C, once all data that are to be assigned to region C are inputted. Thereafter, the block processor 303 ½-rate encodes the processed data. Herein, the dummy bytes may be added by the block processor 303, as described above, or may be added by an external block (not shown).

The group formatter 304 inserts (or allocates) the ½-rate or ¼-rate encoded and inputted mobile service data and known data (e.g., MPEG header place holders, non-systematic RS parity place holders, initialization data place holders, etc.) to the respective regions within the data group shown in FIG. 7A. For example, the mobile service data that are inputted through the first mobile service data path and then ½-rate or ¼-rate encoded are inserted in regions A and B. And, the mobile service data that are inputted through the second mobile service data path and then ½-rate encoded are inserted in region C.

FIG. 15 illustrates detailed exemplary operations of the packet multiplexer 240 according to an embodiment of the present invention. More specifically, the packet multiplexer 240 multiplexes data fields including a data group and data fields only including main service data and outputs the randomized data to the data randomizer 251. According to the present invention, the data fields including a data group are transmitted to a burst-on section. And, the data fields including only the main service data are transmitted to a burst-off section. At this point, the burst-on section may also transmit the main service data. At this point, in order to transmit the RS frame having the size of 540*235 bytes, 18 data groups should be transmitted. Herein, each data group includes field synchronization data, as shown in FIG. 7A. Therefore, the 18 data groups are transmitted during 18 field sections, and the section during which the 18 data groups are being transmitted corresponds to the burst-on section.

In each field within the burst-on section, a data group including field synchronization data is multiplexed with main service data, which are then outputted. For example, in the embodiment of the present invention, in each field within the burst-on section, a data group having the size of 118 segments is multiplexed with a set of main service data having the size of 194 segments. Referring to FIG. 15, during the burst-on section (i.e., during the 18 field sections), a field including 18 data groups is transmitted. Then, during the burst-off section that follows (i.e., during the 12 field sections), a field consisting only of the main service data is transmitted. Subsequently, during a subsequent burst-on section, 18 fields including 18 data groups are transmitted. And, during the following burst-off section, 12 fields consisting only of the main service data are transmitted.

Furthermore, in the present invention, the same type of data service may be provided in the first burst-on section including the first 18 data groups and in the second burst-on section including the next 18 data groups. Alternatively, different types of data service may be provided in each burst-on section. For example, when it is assumed that different data service types are provided to each of the first burst-on section and the second burst-on section of FIG. 15, and that the receiving system wishes to receive only one type of data service, the receiving system turns the power on only during the corresponding burst-on section including the desired data service type so as to receive the corresponding 18 data fields. Then, the receiving system turns the power off during the remaining 42 field sections so as to prevent other data service types from being received. Thus, the amount of power consumption of the receiving system may be reduced. In addition, the receiving system according to the present invention is advantageous in that one RS frame may be configured from the 18 data groups that are received during a single burst-on section.

According to the present invention, the number of data groups included in a burst-on section may vary based upon the size of the RS frame, and the size of the RS frame varies in accordance with the value N. More specifically, by adjusting the value N, the number of data groups within the burst section may be adjusted. Herein, in an example of the present invention, the (235,187)-RS encoding process adjusts the value N during a fixed state. Furthermore, the size of the mobile service data that can be inserted in the data group may vary based upon the sizes of the trellis initialization data or known data, the MPEG header, and the RS parity, which are inserted in the corresponding data group.

Meanwhile, since a data group including mobile service data in-between the data bytes of the main service data during the packet multiplexing process, the shifting of the chronological position (or place) of the main service data packet becomes relative. Also, a system object decoder (i.e., MPEG decoder) for processing the main service data of the receiving system, receives and decodes only the main service data and recognizes the mobile service data packet as a null data packet. Therefore, when the system object decoder of the receiving system receives a main service data packet that is multiplexed with the data group, a packet jitter occurs.

At this point, since a multiple-level buffer for the video data exists in the system object decoder and the size of the buffer is relatively large, the packet jitter generated from the packet multiplexer 240 does not cause any serious problem in case of the video data. However, since the size of the buffer for the audio data is relatively small, the packet jitter may cause considerable problem. More specifically, due to the packet jitter, an overflow or underflow may occur in the buffer for the main service data of the receiving system (e.g., the buffer for the audio data). Therefore, the packet jitter mitigator 220 re-adjusts the relative position of the main service data packet so that the overflow or underflow does not occur in the system object decoder.

In the present invention, examples of repositioning places for the audio data packets within the main service data in order to minimize the influence on the operations of the audio buffer will be described in detail. The packet jitter mitigator 220 repositions the audio data packets in the main service data section so that the audio data packets of the main service data can be as equally and uniformly aligned and positioned as possible. The standard for repositioning the audio data packets in the main service data performed by the packet jitter mitigator 220 will now be described. Herein, it is assumed that the packet jitter mitigator 220 knows the same multiplexing information as that of the packet multiplexer 240, which is placed further behind the packet jitter mitigator 220.

Firstly, if one audio data packet exists in the main service data section (e.g., the main service data section positioned between two data groups) within the burst-on section, the audio data packet is positioned at the very beginning of the main service data section. Alternatively, if two audio data packets exist in the corresponding data section, one audio data packet is positioned at the very beginning and the other audio data packet is positioned at the very end of the main service data section. Further, if more than three audio data packets exist, one audio data packet is positioned at the very beginning of the main service data section, another is positioned at the very end of the main service data section, and the remaining audio data packets are equally positioned between the first and last audio data packets. Secondly, during the main service data section placed immediately before the beginning of a burst-on section (i.e., during a burst-off section), the audio data packet is placed at the very end of the corresponding section.

Thirdly, during a main service data section within the burst-off section after the burst-on section, the audio data packet is positioned at the very end of the main service data section. Finally, the data packets other than audio data packets are positioned in accordance with the inputted order in vacant spaces (i.e., spaces that are not designated for the audio data packets). Meanwhile, when the positions of the main service data packets are relatively re-adjusted, associated program clock reference (PCR) values may also be modified accordingly. The PCR value corresponds to a time reference value for synchronizing the time of the MPEG decoder. Herein, the PCR value is inserted in a specific region of a TS packet and then transmitted. In the example of the present invention, the packet jitter mitigator 220 also performs the operation of modifying the PCR value.

The output of the packet jitter mitigator 220 is inputted to the packet multiplexer 240. As described above, the packet multiplexer 240 multiplexes the main service data packet outputted from the packet jitter mitigator 220 with the mobile service data packet outputted from the pre-processor 230 into a burst structure in accordance with a pre-determined multiplexing rule. Then, the packet multiplexer 240 outputs the multiplexed data packets to the data randomizer 251 of the post-processor 250. If the inputted data correspond to the main service data packet, the data randomizer 251 performs the same randomizing process as that of the conventional randomizer. More specifically, the synchronization byte within the main service data packet is deleted. Then, the remaining 187 data bytes are randomized by using a pseudo random byte generated from the data randomizer 251. Thereafter, the randomized data are outputted to the RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252.

On the other hand, if the inputted data correspond to the mobile service data packet, the data randomizer 251 may randomize only a portion of the data packet. For example, if it is assumed that a randomizing process has already been performed in advance on the mobile service data packet by the pre-processor 230, the data randomizer 251 deletes the synchronization byte from the 4-byte MPEG header included in the mobile service data packet and, then, performs the randomizing process only on the remaining 3 data bytes of the MPEG header. Thereafter, the randomized data bytes are outputted to the RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252. More specifically, the randomizing process is not performed on the remaining portion of the mobile service data excluding the MPEG header. In other words, the remaining portion of the mobile service data packet is directly outputted to the RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252 without being randomized. Also, the data randomizer 251 may or may not perform a randomizing process on the known data (or known data place holders) and the initialization data place holders included in the mobile service data packet.

The RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252 performs an RS encoding process on the data being randomized by the data randomizer 251 or on the data bypassing the data randomizer 251, so as to add 20 bytes of RS parity data. Thereafter, the processed data are outputted to the data interleaver 253. Herein, if the inputted data correspond to the main service data packet, the RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252 performs the same systematic RS encoding process as that of the conventional broadcasting system, thereby adding the 20-byte RS parity data at the end of the 187-byte data. Alternatively, if the inputted data correspond to the mobile service data packet, the RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252 performs a non-systematic RS encoding process. At this point, the 20-byte RS parity data obtained from the non-systematic RS encoding process are inserted in a pre-decided parity byte place within the mobile service data packet.

The data interleaver 253 corresponds to a byte unit convolutional interleaver. The output of the data interleaver 253 is inputted to the parity replacer 254 and to the non-systematic RS encoder 255. Meanwhile, a process of initializing a memory within the trellis encoding module 256 is primarily required in order to decide the output data of the trellis encoding module 256, which is located after the parity replacer 254, as the known data pre-defined according to an agreement between the receiving system and the transmitting system. More specifically, the memory of the trellis encoding module 256 should first be initialized before the received known data sequence is trellis-encoded. At this point, the beginning portion of the known data sequence that is received corresponds to the initialization data place holder and not to the actual known data. Herein, the initialization data place holder has been included in the data by the group formatter within the pre-processor 230 in an earlier process. Therefore, the process of generating initialization data and replacing the initialization data place holder of the corresponding memory with the generated initialization data are required to be performed immediately before the inputted known data sequence is trellis-encoded.

Additionally, a value of the trellis memory initialization data is decided and generated based upon a memory status of the trellis encoding module 256. Further, due to the newly replaced initialization data, a process of newly calculating the RS parity and replacing the RS parity, which is outputted from the data interleaver 253, with the newly calculated RS parity is required. Therefore, the non-systematic RS encoder 255 receives the mobile service data packet including the initialization data place holders, which are to be replaced with the actual initialization data, from the data interleaver 253 and also receives the initialization data from the trellis encoding module 256.

Among the inputted mobile service data packet, the initialization data place holders are replaced with the initialization data, and the RS parity data that are added to the mobile service data packet are removed and processed with non-systematic RS encoding. Thereafter, the new RS parity obtained by performing the non-systematic RS encoding process is outputted to the parity replacer 255. Accordingly, the parity replacer 255 selects the output of the data interleaver 253 as the data within the mobile service data packet, and the parity replacer 255 selects the output of the non-systematic RS encoder 255 as the RS parity. The selected data are then outputted to the trellis encoding module 256.

Meanwhile, if the main service data packet is inputted or if the mobile service data packet, which does not include any initialization data place holders that are to be replaced, is inputted, the parity replacer 254 selects the data and RS parity that are outputted from the data interleaver 253. Then, the parity replacer 254 directly outputs the selected data to the trellis encoding module 256 without any modification. The trellis encoding module 256 converts the byte-unit data to symbol units and performs a 12-way interleaving process so as to trellis-encode the received data. Thereafter, the processed data are outputted to the synchronization multiplexer 260.

The synchronization multiplexer 260 inserts a field synchronization signal and a segment synchronization signal to the data outputted from the trellis encoding module 256 and, then, outputs the processed data to the pilot inserter 271 of the transmission unit 270. Herein, the data having a pilot inserted therein by the pilot inserter 271 are modulated by the modulator 272 in accordance with a pre-determined modulating method (e.g., a VSB method). Thereafter, the modulated data are transmitted to each receiving system though the radio frequency (RF) up-converter 273.

Block Processor

FIG. 16 illustrates a block diagram showing a structure of a block processor according to the present invention. Herein, the block processor includes a byte-bit converter 401, a symbol encoder 402, a symbol interleaver 403, and a symbol-byte converter 404. The byte-bit converter 401 divides the mobile service data bytes that are inputted from the RS frame encoder 112 into bits, which are then outputted to the symbol encoder 402. The byte-symbol converter 401 may also receive signaling information including transmission parameters. The signaling information data bytes are also divided into bits so as to be outputted to the symbol encoder 402. Herein, the signaling information including transmission parameters may be processed with the same data processing step as that of the mobile service data. More specifically, the signaling information may be inputted to the block processor 303 by passing through the data randomizer 301 and the RS frame encoder 302. Alternatively, the signaling information may also be directly outputted to the block processor 303 without passing though the data randomizer 301 and the RS frame encoder 302.

The symbol encoder 402 corresponds to a D/E-rate encoder encoding the inputted data from D bits to E bits and outputting the data encoded at the coding rate of D/E. For example, when 1 input data bit is encoded to 2 bits and then outputted, D is equal to 1 (i.e., D=1), and E is equal to 2 (i.e., E=2). And, when 1 input data bit is encoded to 4 bits and then outputted, D is equal to 1 (i.e., D=1), and E is equal to 4 (i.e., E=4). According to the embodiment of the present invention, the symbol encoder 402 performs either a coding rate of ½ (also referred to as a ½-rate encoding process) or an encoding process at a coding rate of ¼ (also referred to as a ¼-rate encoding process). The symbol encoder 402 performs one of ½-rate encoding and ¼-rate encoding on the inputted mobile service data and signaling information. Thereafter, the signaling information is also recognized as the mobile service data and processed accordingly. The symbol encoder 402 may be operated as an encoder having the coding rate of ½ or may be operated as an encoder having the coding rate of ¼.

FIG. 17A to FIG. 17C illustrate block views showing exemplary operations of the symbol encoder having the coding rate of ¼ according to an embodiment of the present invention. The symbol encoder of FIG. 17A includes a ¼ outer encoder 411, and a parallel/serial converter 412. Referring to FIG. 17A, the ¼ outer encoder 411 encodes a mobile service data bit U, which is being inputted to the ¼ outer encoder 411, to u0 to u3 (i.e., to 2 symbols). Then, the ¼ outer encoder 411 outputs the two encoded symbols to the parallel/serial converter 412. The parallel/serial converter 412 converts the two inputted symbols to serial symbol units, which are then serially outputted to the symbol interleaver 403. More specifically, the parallel/serial converter 412 outputs one symbol, which is configured of u0 and u1, to the symbol interleaver 403. And, then the parallel/serial converter 412 outputs another symbol, which is configured of u2 and u3, to the symbol interleaver 403.

The symbol encoder of FIG. 17B includes a ½ outer encoder 421 and a repeater 422. Referring to FIG. 17B, the ½ outer encoder 421 encodes a mobile service data bit U, which is being inputted to the ½ outer encoder 421, to u0 and u1 (i.e., to 1 symbol). Then, the ½ outer encoder 421 outputs the encoded symbol to the repeater 422. The repeater 422 repeats the ½-rate encoded symbol one time and outputs the repeated symbol to the symbol interleaver 403. More specifically, the repeater 422 outputs the symbol configured of bit u0 and bit u1 to the symbol interleaver 403. Then, the repeater 422 outputs the symbol configured of bit u0 and bit u1 once again to the symbol interleaver 403.

The symbol encoder of FIG. 17C includes a repeater 431 and a ½ outer encoder 432. Referring to FIG. 17C, the repeater 431 repeats a mobile service data bit U, which is being inputted to the repeater 431, so as to output two bits U and U to the ½ outer encoder 432. Thereafter, the ½ outer encoder 432 encodes the mobile service data bit U being outputted from the repeater 431, to u0 and u1 (i.e., to 1 symbol). Then, the ½ outer encoder 431 outputs the encoded symbol to the symbol interleaver 403. At this point, since identical mobile service data bits U are sequentially inputted to the ½ outer encoder 432 twice, the ½ outer encoder 432 performs the ½-rate encoding process twice on the mobile service data bit U, which is being inputted to the repeater 431.

More specifically, when the symbol encoder 402 repeatedly outputs 2 symbols encoded at a coding rate of ½, as shown in FIG. 17B, or when the symbol encoder 402 performs the ½-rate encoding process two times on the input data bit and then outputs the encoded data bit, as shown in FIG. 17C, the overall coding rate becomes ¼. As described above, when the symbol encoder 402 is operated as an encoder having a coding rate of ¼, the input data bit may be encoded at a coding rate of ¼, so that each symbol can be sequentially outputted one by one. Alternatively, the input data may be encoded at a coding rate of ½ and then repeated one time, so that each symbol can be sequentially outputted one by one. Furthermore, the input data bit may be encoded at a coding rate of ½ two times, so that each symbol can be sequentially outputted one by one.

Meanwhile, when the symbol encoder 402 is operated as an encoder having a coding rate of ½, the input data bit is encoded at a coding rate of ½ by the ½ outer encoder and then outputted. Alternatively, the input data bit may also be encoded at a coding rate of ¼ by the ¼ outer encoder. Thereafter, when only one of the two symbols is selected and outputted, the symbol encoder 402 may be operated as an encoder having the coding rate of ½. In the description of the present invention, the ½-coding rate and the ¼-coding rate are merely exemplary, and the coding rate may vary depending upon the selection of the encoded symbols or the number of repetition of the symbols. Therefore, the present invention will not be limited only to the examples given in the embodiments of the present invention. Nevertheless, if the coding rate is low, the actual amount of data that can be transmitted becomes smaller, accordingly. Therefore, these two factors should be accounted for when deciding the coding rate.

FIG. 18A illustrates a detailed block view of a ½ outer encoder according to an embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 18A, the ½ outer encoder includes two delays (or a first delay and a second delay) 501 and 503, and one adder 502. Herein, the ½ outer encoder encodes the input data bit U, so that 2 bits (i.e., u0 and u1) can be outputted. At this point, the input data bit U corresponds to an upper bit u0, which is outputted without modification and at the same time encoded to be outputted as a lower bit u1. More specifically, the input data bit U is directly outputted as the upper bit u0 without modification and, simultaneously, outputted to the adder 502.

The adder 502 adds the input data bit U and the output of the first delay 501, which are then outputted to the second delay 503. Thereafter, the data that have been delayed by a set period of time (e.g., by 1 clock) are outputted as the lower bit u1 and, at the same time, fed-back to the first delay 501. Subsequently, the first delay 501 delays data fed-back by from the second delay 503 by a set period of time (e.g., by 1 clock). Then, the delayed data are outputted to the adder 502. At this point, if the data bit U being inputted to the symbol encoder 402 corresponds to a data bit that is to be encoded at a coding rate of ¼, a symbol configured of u0u1 bits may be repeated twice and then outputted. Alternatively, the input data bit U may be repeated once, which is then inputted to the ½ outer encoder of FIG. 18A.

FIG. 18B illustrates a detailed block view of a ¼ outer encoder according to an embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 18B, the ¼ outer encoder includes two delays (or a first delay and a second delay) 501 and 503, and three adders 502, 504, and 505. Herein, the ¼ outer encoder encodes the input data bit U, so that 4 bits (i.e., u0 to u3) can be outputted. At this point, the input data bit U corresponds to an uppermost bit u0, which is outputted without modification and at the same time encoded to be outputted as lower bit u1u2u3. More specifically, the input data bit U is directly outputted as the uppermost bit u0 and simultaneously outputted to the first and third adders 502 and 505. The first adder 502 adds the input data bit U and the output bit of the first delay unit 501 and, then, outputs the added bit to the second delay unit 503. Then, the data bit delayed by a pre-determined time (e.g., by 1 clock) in the second delay unit 503 is outputted as lower bit u1 and simultaneously fed-back to the first delay unit 501. The first delay unit 501 delays the data bit fed-back from the second delay unit 503 by a pre-determined time (e.g., by 1 clock). Then, the first delay unit 501 outputs the delayed data bit to the first adder 502 and the second adder 504. The second adder 504 adds the data bits outputted from the first and second delay units 501 and 503 as a lower bit u2. The third adder 505 adds the input data bit U and the output of the second delay unit 503 and outputs the added data bit as a lower bit u3.

At this point, if the input data bit U corresponds to data encoded at a ½-coding rate, the symbol encoder 402 configures a symbol with u0u1 bits from the 4 output bits u0u1u2u3. Then, the symbol encoder 402 outputs the newly configured symbol. Alternatively, if the input data bit U corresponds to data encoded at a ¼-coding rate, the symbol encoder 402 configures and outputs a symbol with bits u0u1 and, then, configures and outputs another symbol with bits u2u3. According to another embodiment of the present invention, if the input data bit U corresponds to data encoded at a ¼-coding rate, the symbol encoder 402 may also configure and output a symbol with bits u0u1, and then repeat the process once again and output the corresponding bits.

According to yet another embodiment of the present invention, the symbol encoder outputs all four output bits U u0u1u2u3. Then, when using the ½-coding rate, the symbol interleaver 403 located behind the symbol encoder 402 selects only the symbol configured of bits u0u1 from the four output bits u0u1u2u3. Alternatively, when using the ¼-coding rate, the symbol interleaver 403 may select the symbol configured of bits u0u1 and then select another symbol configured of bits u2u3. According to another embodiment, when using the ¼-coding rate, the symbol interleaver 403 may repeatedly select the symbol configured of bits u0u1.

The output of the symbol encoder 402 is inputted to the symbol interleaver 403. Then, the symbol interleaver 403 performs block interleaving in symbol units on the data outputted from the symbol encoder 402. Any interleaver performing structural rearrangement (or realignment) may be applied as the symbol interleaver 403 of the block processor. However, in the present invention, a variable length symbol interleaver that can be applied even when a plurality of lengths is provided for the symbol, so that its order may be rearranged, may also be used.

FIG. 19( a) to FIG. 19( c) illustrate a symbol interleaver according to an embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the symbol interleaver according to the embodiment of the present invention corresponds to a variable length symbol interleaver that may be applied even when a plurality of lengths is provided for the symbol, so that its order may be rearranged. Particularly, FIG. 19( a) to FIG. 19( c) illustrate an example of the symbol interleaver when BK=6 and BL=8. Herein, BK indicates a number of symbols that are outputted for symbol interleaving from the symbol encoder 402. And, BL represents a number of symbols that are actually interleaved by the symbol interleaver 403.

In the present invention, the symbol interleaver 403 should satisfy the conditions of BL=2^(n) (wherein n is an integer) and of BL≧BK. If there is a difference in value between BK and BL, (BL−BK) number of null (or dummy) symbols is added, thereby creating an interleaving pattern. Therefore, BK becomes a block size of the actual symbols that are inputted to the symbol interleaver 403 in order to be interleaved. BL becomes an interleaving unit when the interleaving process is performed by an interleaving pattern created from the symbol interleaver 403.

The example of what is described above is illustrated in FIG. 19( a) to FIG. 19( c). The number of symbols outputted from the symbol encoder 402 in order to be interleaved is equal to 6 (i.e., BK=6). In other words, 6 symbols are outputted from the symbol encoder 402 in order to be interleaved. And, the actual interleaving unit (BL) is equal to 8 symbols. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19( a), 2 symbols are added to the null (or dummy) symbol, thereby creating the interleaving pattern. Equation 4 shown below described the process of sequentially receiving BK number of symbols, the order of which is to be rearranged, and obtaining an BL value satisfying the conditions of BL=2^(n) (wherein n is an integer) and of BL≧BK, thereby creating the interleaving so as to realign (or rearrange) the symbol order.

In relation to all places, wherein 0≦i≦BL−1,

P(i)={S×i×(i+1)/2} mod BL  Equation 4

Herein, BL≧BK, BL=2^(n), and n and S are integers. FIG. 12 shows an example of an interleaving pattern and an interleaving process, wherein it is assumed that S is equal to 89, and that BL is equal to 8. As shown in FIG. 19( b), the order of BK number of input symbols and (BL-BK) number of null symbols is rearranged by using the above-mentioned Equation 4. Then, as shown in FIG. 19( c), the null byte places are removed, so as to rearrange the order, by using Equation 5 shown below. Thereafter, the symbol that is interleaved by the rearranged order is then outputted to the symbol-byte converter.

if P(i)>BK−1, then P(i) place is removed and rearranged  Equation 5

Subsequently, the symbol-byte converter 404 converts to bytes the mobile service data symbols, having the rearranging of the symbol order completed and then outputted in accordance with the rearranged order from the symbol interleaver 403, and thereafter outputs the converted bytes to the group formatter 304.

FIG. 20A illustrates a block diagram showing the structure of a block processor according to another embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the block processor includes an interleaving unit 610 and a block formatter 620. The interleaving unit 610 may include a byte-symbol converter 611, a symbol-byte converter 612, a symbol interleaver 613, and a symbol-byte converter 614. Herein, the symbol interleaver 613 may also be referred to as a block interleaver.

The byte-symbol converter 611 of the interleaving unit 610 converts the mobile service data X outputted in byte units from the RS frame encoder 302 to symbol units. Then, the byte-symbol converter 611 outputs the converted mobile service data symbols to the symbol-byte converter 612 and the symbol interleaver 613. More specifically, the byte-symbol converter 611 converts each 2 bits of the inputted mobile service data byte (=8 bits) to 1 symbol and outputs the converted symbols. This is because the input data of the trellis encoding module 256 consist of symbol units configured of 2 bits. The relationship between the block processor 303 and the trellis encoding module 256 will be described in detail in a later process. At this point, the byte-symbol converter 611 may also receive signaling information including transmission parameters. Furthermore, the signaling information bytes may also be divided into symbol units and then outputted to the symbol-byte converter and the symbol interleaver 613.

The symbol-byte converter 612 groups 4 symbols outputted from the byte-symbol converter 611 so as to configure a byte. Thereafter, the converted data bytes are outputted to the block formatter 620. Herein, each of the symbol-byte converter 612 and the byte-symbol converter 611 respectively performs an inverse process of one another. Therefore, the yields (or results) of these two blocks are offset. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 20B, the input data X bypass the byte-symbol converter 611 and the symbol-byte converter and are directly inputted to the block formatter 620. More specifically, the interleaving unit 610 of FIG. 20B has a structure equivalent to that of the interleaving unit shown in FIG. 20A. Therefore, the same reference numerals will be used in FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B.

The symbol interleaver 613 performs block interleaving in symbol units on the data that are outputted from the byte-symbol converter 611. Subsequently, the symbol interleaver outputs the interleaved data to the symbol-byte converter 614. Herein, any type of interleaver that can rearrange the structural order may be used as the symbol interleaver 613 of the present invention. In the example given in the present invention, a variable length interleaver that may be applied for symbols having a wide range of lengths, the order of which is to be rearranged. For example, the symbol interleaver of FIG. 19 may also be used in the block processor shown in FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B.

The symbol-byte converter 614 outputs the symbols having the rearranging of the symbol order completed by the symbol interleaver 613, in accordance with the rearranged order. Thereafter, the symbols are grouped to be configured in byte units, which are then outputted to the block formatter 620. More specifically, the symbol-byte converter 614 groups 4 symbols outputted from the symbol interleaver 613 so as to configure a data byte. As shown in FIG. 21, the block formatter 620 performs the process of aligning the output of each symbol-byte converter 612 and 614 within the block in accordance with a set standard. Herein, the block formatter 620 operates in association with the trellis encoding module 256.

More specifically, the block formatter 620 decides the output order of the mobile service data outputted from each symbol-byte converter 612 and 614 while taking into consideration the place (or order) of the data excluding the mobile service data that are being inputted, wherein the mobile service data include main service data, known data, RS parity data, and MPEG header data.

According to the embodiment of the present invention, the trellis encoding module 256 is provided with 12 trellis encoders. FIG. 22 illustrates a block diagram showing the trellis encoding module 256 according to the present invention. In the example shown in FIG. 22, 12 identical trellis encoders are combined to the interleaver in order to disperse noise. Herein, each trellis encoder may be provided with a pre-coder.

FIG. 23A illustrates the block processor 303 being concatenated with the trellis encoding module 256. In the transmitting system, a plurality of blocks actually exists between the pre-processor 230 including the block processor and the trellis encoding module 256, as shown in FIG. 3. Conversely, the receiving system considers the pre-processor to be concatenated with the trellis encoding module 256, thereby performing the decoding process accordingly. However, the data excluding the mobile service data that are being inputted to the trellis encoding module 256, wherein the mobile service data include main service data, known data, RS parity data, and MPEG header data, correspond to data that are added to the blocks existing between the block processor and the trellis encoding module 256. FIG. 23B illustrates an example of a data processor 650 being positioned between the block processor 303 and the trellis encoding module 256, while taking the above-described instance into consideration.

Herein, when the interleaving unit 610 of the block processor 303 performs a ½-rate encoding process, the interleaving unit 610 may be configured as shown in FIG. 20A (or FIG. 20B). Referring to FIG. 3, for example, the data processor 650 may include a group formatter 304, a data deinterleaver 305, a packet formatter 306, and a packet multiplexer 240, and a data randomizer 251, a RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder 252, a data interleaver 253, a parity replacer 254, and a non-systematic RS encoder 255 of a post-processor 250.

At this point, the trellis encoding module 256 symbolizes the data that are being inputted so as to divide the symbolized data and to send the divided data to each trellis encoder in accordance with a pre-defined method. Herein, one byte is converted into 4 symbols, each being configured of 2 bits. Also, the symbols created from the single data byte are all transmitted to the same trellis encoder. Accordingly, each trellis encoder pre-codes an upper bit of the input symbol, which is then outputted as the uppermost output bit C2. Alternatively, each trellis encoder trellis-encodes a lower bit of the input symbol, which is then outputted as two output bits C1 and C0. The block formatter 620 is controlled so that the data byte outputted from each symbol-byte converter can be transmitted to different trellis encoders.

Hereinafter, the operation of the block formatter 620 will now be described in detail with reference to FIG. 16 to FIG. 20. Referring to FIG. 20A, for example, the data byte outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 and the data byte outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 are inputted to different trellis encoders of the trellis encoding module 256 in accordance with the control of the block formatter 620. Hereinafter, the data byte outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 will be referred to as X, and the data byte outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 will be referred to as Y, for simplicity. Referring to FIG. 21( a), each number (i.e., 0 to 11) indicates the first to twelfth trellis encoders of the trellis encoding module 256, respectively.

In addition, the output order of both symbol-byte converters are arranged (or aligned) so that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 are respectively inputted to the 0^(th) to 5^(th) trellis encoders (0 to 5) of the trellis encoding module 256, and that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 are respectively inputted to the 6^(th) to 11^(th) trellis encoders (6 to 11) of the trellis encoding module 256. Herein, the trellis encoders having the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 allocated therein, and the trellis encoders having the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 allocated therein are merely examples given to simplify the understanding of the present invention. Furthermore, according to an embodiment of the present invention, and assuming that the input data of the block processor 303 correspond to a block configured of 12 bytes, the symbol-byte converter 612 outputs 12 data bytes from X0 to X11, and the symbol-byte converter 614 outputs 12 data bytes from Y0 to Y11.

FIG. 21( b) illustrates an example of data being inputted to the trellis encoding module 256. Particularly, FIG. 21( b) illustrates an example of not only the mobile service data but also the main service data and RS parity data being inputted to the trellis encoding module 256, so as to be distributed to each trellis encoder. More specifically, the mobile service data outputted from the block processor 303 pass through the group formatter 304, from which the mobile service data are mixed with the main service data and RS parity data and then outputted, as shown in FIG. 21( a). Accordingly, each data byte is respectively inputted to the 12 trellis encoders in accordance with the positions (or places) within the data group after being data-interleaved.

Herein, when the output data bytes X and Y of the symbol-byte converters 612 and 614 are assigned to each respective trellis encoder, the input of each trellis encoder may be configured as shown in FIG. 21( b). More specifically, referring to FIG. 21( b), the six mobile service data bytes (X0 to X5) outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612 are sequentially assigned (or distributed) to the first to sixth trellis encoders (0 to 5) of the trellis encoding module 256. Also, the 2 mobile service data bytes Y0 and Y1 outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614 are sequentially assigned to the 7^(th) and 8^(th) trellis encoders (6 and 7) of the trellis encoding module 256. Thereafter, among the 5 main service data bytes, 4 data bytes are sequentially assigned to the 9^(th) and 12^(th) trellis encoders (8 to 11) of the trellis encoding module 256. Finally, the remaining 1 byte of the main service data byte is assigned once again to the first trellis encoder (0).

It is assumed that the mobile service data, the main service data, and the RS parity data are assigned to each trellis encoder, as shown in FIG. 21( b). It is also assumed that, as described above, the input of the block processor 303 is configured of 12 bytes, and that 12 bytes from X0 to X11 are outputted from the symbol-byte converter 612, and that 12 bytes from Y0 to Y11 are outputted from the symbol-byte converter 614. In this case, as shown in FIG. 21( c), the block formatter 620 arranges the data bytes that are to be outputted from the symbol-byte converters 612 and 614 by the order of X0 to X5, Y0, Y1, X6 to X10, Y2 to Y7, X11, and Y8 to Y11. More specifically, the trellis encoder that is to perform the encoding process is decided based upon the position (or place) within the transmission frame in which each data byte is inserted. At this point, not only the mobile service data but also the main service data, the MPEG header data, and the RS parity data are also inputted to the trellis encoding module 256. Herein, it is assumed that, in order to perform the above-described operation, the block formatter 620 is informed of (or knows) the information on the data group format after the data-interleaving process.

FIG. 24 illustrates a block diagram of the block processor performing an encoding process at a coding rate of 1/N according to an embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the block processor includes (N−1) number of symbol interleavers 741 to 74N−1, which are configured in a parallel structure. More specifically, the block processor having the coding rate of 1/N consists of a total of N number of branches (or paths) including a branch (or path), which is directly transmitted to the block formatter 730. In addition, the symbol interleaver 741 to 74N−1 of each branch may each be configured of a different symbol interleaver. Furthermore, (N−1) number of symbol-byte converter 751 to 75N−1 each corresponding to each (N−1) number of symbol interleavers 741 to 74N−1 may be included at the end of each symbol interleaver, respectively. Herein, the output data of the (N−1) number of symbol-byte converter 751 to 75N−1 are also inputted to the block formatter 730.

In the example of the present invention, N is equal to or smaller than 12. If N is equal to 12, the block formatter 730 may align the output data so that the output byte of the 12^(th) symbol-byte converter 75N−1 is inputted to the 12^(th) trellis encoder. Alternatively, if N is equal to 3, the block formatter 730 may arrange the output order, so that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 720 are inputted to the 1^(st) to 4^(th) trellis encoders of the trellis encoding module 256, and that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 751 are inputted to the 5^(th) to 8^(th) trellis encoders, and that the data bytes outputted from the symbol-byte converter 752 are inputted to the 9^(th) to 12^(th) trellis encoders. At this point, the order of the data bytes outputted from each symbol-byte converter may vary in accordance with the position within the data group of the data other than the mobile service data, which are mixed with the mobile service data that are outputted from each symbol-byte converter.

FIG. 25 illustrates a detailed block diagram showing the structure of a block processor according to another embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the block formatter is removed from the block processor so that the operation of the block formatter may be performed by a group formatter. More specifically, the block processor of FIG. 25 may include a byte-symbol converter 810, symbol-byte converters 820 and 840, and a symbol interleaver 830. In this case, the output of each symbol-byte converter 820 and 840 is inputted to the group formatter 850.

Also, the block processor may obtain a desired coding rate by adding symbol interleavers and symbol-byte converters. If the system designer wishes a coding rate of 1/N, the block processor needs to be provided with a total of N number of branches (or paths) including a branch (or path) directly transmitted to the block formatter 850, and (N−1) number of symbol interleavers and symbol-byte converters configured in a parallel structure with (N−1) number of branches. At this point, the group formatter 850 inserts place holders ensuring the positions (or places) for the MPEG header, the non-systematic RS parity, and the main service data. And, at the same time, the group formatter 850 positions the data bytes outputted from each branch of the block processor.

The number of trellis encoders, the number of symbol-byte converters, and the number of symbol interleavers proposed in the present invention are merely exemplary. And, therefore, the corresponding numbers do not limit the spirit or scope of the present invention. It is apparent to those skilled in the art that the type and position of each data byte being allocated to each trellis encoder of the trellis encoding module 256 may vary in accordance with the data group format. Therefore, the present invention should not be understood merely by the examples given in the description set forth herein. The mobile service data that are encoded at a coding rate of 1/N and outputted from the block processor 303 are inputted to the group formatter 304. Herein, in the example of the present invention, the order of the output data outputted from the block formatter of the block processor 303 are aligned and outputted in accordance with the position of the data bytes within the data group.

Signaling Information Processing

The transmitter 200 according to the present invention may insert transmission parameters by using a plurality of methods and in a plurality of positions (or places), which are then transmitted to the receiving system. For simplicity, the definition of a transmission parameter that is to be transmitted from the transmitter to the receiving system will now be described. The transmission parameter includes data group information, region information within a data group, the number of RS frames configuring a super frame (i.e., a super frame size (SFS)), the number of RS parity data bytes (P) for each column within the RS frame, whether or not a checksum, which is added to determine the presence of an error in a row direction within the RS frame, has been used, the type and size of the checksum if the checksum is used (presently, 2 bytes are added to the CRC), the number of data groups configuring one RS frame—since the RS frame is transmitted to one burst section, the number of data groups configuring the one RS frame is identical to the number of data groups within one burst (i.e., burst size (BS)), a turbo code mode, and a RS code mode.

Also, the transmission parameter required for receiving a burst includes a burst period—herein, one burst period corresponds to a value obtained by counting the number of fields starting from the beginning of a current burst until the beginning of a next burst, a positioning order of the RS frames that are currently being transmitted within a super frame (i.e., a permuted frame index (PFI)) or a positioning order of groups that are currently being transmitted within a RS frame (burst) (i.e., a group index (GI)), and a burst size. Depending upon the method of managing a burst, the transmission parameter also includes the number of fields remaining until the beginning of the next burst (i.e., time to next burst (TNB)). And, by transmitting such information as the transmission parameter, each data group being transmitted to the receiving system may indicate a relative distance (or number of fields) between a current position and the beginning of a next burst.

The information included in the transmission parameter corresponds to examples given to facilitate the understanding of the present invention. Therefore, the proposed examples do not limit the scope or spirit of the present invention and may be easily varied or modified by anyone skilled in the art. According to the first embodiment of the present invention, the transmission parameter may be inserted by allocating a predetermined region of the mobile service data packet or the data group. In this case, the receiving system performs synchronization and equalization on a received signal, which is then decoded by symbol units. Thereafter, the packet deformatter may separate the mobile service data and the transmission parameter so as to detect the transmission parameter. According to the first embodiment, the transmission parameter may be inserted from the group formatter 304 and then transmitted.

According to the second embodiment of the present invention, the transmission parameter may be multiplexed with another type of data. For example, when known data are multiplexed with the mobile service data, a transmission parameter may be inserted, instead of the known data, in a place (or position) where a known data byte is to be inserted. Alternatively, the transmission parameter may be mixed with the known data and then inserted in the place where the known data byte is to be inserted. According to the second embodiment, the transmission parameter may be inserted from the group formatter 304 or from the packet formatter 306 and then transmitted. For example, a service identifier respective of a broadcast program, the RS mode of regions A and B within a data group, the RS mode of region C, a super frame size (SFS), position information occupied by an RS frame within the super frame (i.e., permuted frame index (PFI)), a burst size (BS), a data group index (GI), and a time to next burst (TNB) may be inserted in the first known data region to the fourth known data pattern region and then transmitted, as shown in FIG. 8.

According to a third embodiment of the present invention, the transmission parameter may be inserted by allocating a portion of a reserved region within a field synchronization segment of a transmission frame. In this case, since the receiving system may perform decoding on a receiving signal by symbol units before detecting the transmission parameter, the transmission parameter having information on the processing methods of the block processor 303 and the group formatter 304 may be inserted in a reserved field of a field synchronization signal. More specifically, the receiving system obtains field synchronization by using a field synchronization segment so as to detect the transmission parameter from a pre-decided position. According to the third embodiment, the transmission parameter may be inserted from the synchronization multiplexer 240 and then transmitted.

According to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the transmission parameter may be inserted in a layer (or hierarchical region) higher than a transport stream (TS) packet. In this case, the receiving system should be able to receive a signal and process the received signal to a layer higher than the TS packet in advance. At this point, the transmission parameter may be used to certify the transmission parameter of a currently received signal and to provide the transmission parameter of a signal that is to be received in a later process.

In the present invention, the variety of transmission parameters associated with the transmission signal may be inserted and transmitted by using the above-described methods according to the first to fourth embodiment of the present invention. At this point, the transmission parameter may be inserted and transmitted by using only one of the four embodiments described above, or by using a selection of the above-described embodiments, or by using all of the above-described embodiments. Furthermore, the information included in the transmission parameter may be duplicated and inserted in each embodiment. Alternatively, only the required information may be inserted in the corresponding position of the corresponding embodiment and then transmitted. Furthermore, in order to ensure robustness of the transmission parameter, a block encoding process of a short cycle (or period) may be performed on the transmission parameter and, then, inserted in a corresponding region. The method for performing a short-period block encoding process on the transmission parameter may include, for example, Kerdock encoding, BCH encoding, RS encoding, and repetition encoding of the transmission parameter. Also, a combination of a plurality of block encoding methods may also be performed on the transmission parameter.

The transmission parameters may be grouped to create a block code of a small size, so as to be inserted in a byte place allocated within the data group for signaling and then transmitted. However, in this case, the block code passes through the block decoded from the receiving end so as to obtain a transmission parameter value. Therefore, the transmission parameters of the turbo code mode and the RS code mode, which are required for block decoding, should first be obtained. Accordingly, the transmission parameters associated with a particular mode may be inserted in a specific section of a known data region. And, in this case, a correlation of with a symbol may be used for a faster decoding process. The receiving system refers to the correlation between each sequence and the currently received sequences, thereby determining the encoding mode and the combination mode.

Meanwhile, when the transmission parameter is inserted in the field synchronization segment region or the known data region and then transmitted, and when the transmission parameter has passed through the transmission channel, the reliability of the transmission parameter is deteriorated. Therefore, one of a plurality of pre-defined patterns may also be inserted in accordance with the corresponding transmission parameter. Herein, the receiving system performs a correlation calculation between the received signal and the pre-defined patterns so as to recognize the transmission parameter. For example, it is assumed that a burst including 5 data groups is pre-decided as pattern F based upon an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system. In this case, the transmitting system inserts and transmits pattern F, when the number of groups within the burst is equal to 5. Thereafter, the receiving system calculates a correlation between the received data and a plurality of reference patterns including pattern F, which was created in advance. At this point, if the correlation value between the received data and pattern F is the greatest, the received data indicates the corresponding parameter, and most particularly, the number of groups within the burst. At this point, the number of groups may be acknowledged as 5. Hereinafter, the process of inserting and transmitting the transmission parameter will now be described according to first, second, and third embodiments of the present invention.

FIRST EMBODIMENT

FIG. 26 illustrates a schematic diagram of the group formatter 304 receiving the transmission parameter and inserting the received transmission parameter in region A of the data group according to the present invention. Herein, the group formatter 304 receives mobile service data from the block processor 303. Conversely, the transmission parameter is processed with at least one of a data randomizing process, a RS frame encoding process, and a block processing process, and may then be inputted to the group formatter 304. Alternatively, the transmission parameter may be directly inputted to the group formatter 304 without being processed with any of the above-mentioned processes. In addition, the transmission parameter may be provided from the service multiplexer 100. Alternatively, the transmission parameter may also be generated and provided from within the transmitter 200. The transmission parameter may also include information required by the receiving system in order to receive and process the data included in the data group. For example, the transmission parameter may include data group information, and multiplexing information.

The group formatter 304 inserts the mobile service data and transmission parameter which are to be inputted to corresponding regions within the data group in accordance with a rule for configuring a data group. For example, the transmission parameter passes through a block encoding process of a short period and is, then, inserted in region A of the data group. Particularly, the transmission parameter may be inserted in a pre-arranged and arbitrary position (or place) within region A. If it is assumed that the transmission parameter has been block-encoded by the block processor 303, the block processor 303 performs the same data processing operation as the mobile service data, more specifically, either a ½-rate encoding or ¼-rate encoding process on the signaling information including the transmission parameter. Thereafter, the block processor 303 outputs the processed transmission parameter to the group formatter 304. Thereafter, the signaling information is also recognized as the mobile service data and processed accordingly.

FIG. 27 illustrates a block diagram showing an example of the block processor receiving the transmission parameter and processing the received transmission parameter with the same process as the mobile service data. Particularly, FIG. 27 illustrates an example showing the structure of FIG. 16 further including a signaling information provider 411 and multiplexer 412. More specifically, the signaling information provider 411 outputs the signaling information including the transmission parameter to the multiplexer 412. The multiplexer 412 multiplexes the signaling information and the output of the RS frame encoder 302. Then, the multiplexer 412 outputs the multiplexed data to the byte-bit converter 401.

The byte-bit converter 401 divides the mobile service data bytes or signaling information byte outputted from the multiplexer 412 into bits, which are then outputted to the symbol encoder 402. The subsequent operations are identical to those described in FIG. 16. Therefore, a detailed description of the same will be omitted for simplicity. If any of the detailed structures of the block processor 303 shown in FIG. 20, FIG. 23, FIG. 24, and FIG. 25, the signaling information provider 411 and the multiplexer 412 may be provided after the byte-symbol converter.

SECOND EMBODIMENT

Meanwhile, when known data generated from the group formatter in accordance with a pre-decided rule are inserted in a corresponding region within the data group, a transmission parameter may be inserted in at least a portion of a region, where known data may be inserted, instead of the known data. For example, when a long known data sequence is inserted at the beginning of region A within the data group, a transmission parameter may be inserted in at least a portion of the beginning of region A, such as the first known data region to the fourth known data pattern region, instead of the known data. A portion of the known data sequence that is inserted in the remaining portion of region A, excluding the portion in which the transmission parameter is inserted, may be used to detect a starting point of the data group by the receiving system, as shown in FIG. 8. Alternatively, another portion of region A may be used for channel equalization by the receiving system.

In addition, when the transmission parameter is inserted in the known data region instead of the actual known data. The transmission parameter may be block encoded in short periods and then inserted. Also, as described above, the transmission parameter may also be inserted based upon a pre-defined pattern in accordance with the transmission parameter. If the group formatter 304 inserts known data place holders in a region within the data group, wherein known data may be inserted, instead of the actual known data, the transmission parameter may be inserted by the packet formatter 306. More specifically, when the group formatter 304 inserts the known data place holders, the packet formatter 306 may insert the known data instead of the known data place holders. Alternatively, when the group formatter 304 inserts the known data, the known data may be directly outputted without modification.

FIG. 28 illustrates a block diagram showing the structure of a packet formatter 306 being expanded so that the packet formatter 306 can insert the transmission parameter according to an embodiment of the present invention. More specifically, the structure of the packet formatter 306 further includes a known data generator 351 and a signaling multiplexer 352. For example, the transmission parameter being inputted to the signaling multiplexer 352 may include information on a length of the current burst, information indicating the starting point of a next burst, information on positions and lengths of groups within the burst, information on a time to a next group from the current group within the burst, and information on the known data.

The signaling multiplexer 352 selects one of the transmission parameter and the known data generated from the known data generator 351 and, then, outputs the selected data to the packet formatter 306. The packet formatter 306 inserts the known data or transmission parameter outputted from the signaling multiplexer 352 into the known data place holders outputted from the data deinterleaver 305. Then, the packet formatter 306 outputs the processed data. More specifically, the packet formatter 306 inserts a transmission parameter in at least a portion of the known data region instead of the known data, which is then outputted. For example, when a known data place holder is inserted at a beginning portion of region A within the data group, a transmission parameter may be inserted in a portion of the known data place holder instead of the actual known data.

Also, when the transmission parameter is inserted in the known data place holder instead of the known data, the transmission parameter may be block encoded in short periods and inserted. Alternatively, a pre-defined pattern may be inserted in accordance with the transmission parameter. More specifically, the signaling multiplexer 352 multiplexes the known data and the transmission parameter (or the pattern defined by the transmission parameter) so as to configure a new known data sequence. Then, the signaling multiplexer 352 outputs the newly configured known data sequence to the packet formatter 306. The packet formatter 306 deletes the main service data place holder and RS parity place holder from the output of the data deinterleaver 305, and creates a mobile service data packet of 188 bytes by using the mobile service data, MPEG header, and the output of the signaling multiplexer. Then, the packet formatter 306 outputs the newly created mobile service data packet to the packet multiplexer 240.

In this case, the region A of each data group has a different known data pattern. Therefore, the receiving system separates only the symbol in a pre-arranged section of the known data sequence and recognizes the separated symbol as the transmission parameter. Herein, depending upon the design of the transmitting system, the known data may be inserted in different blocks, such as the packet formatter 306, the group formatter 304, or the block processor 303. Therefore, a transmission parameter may be inserted instead of the known data in the block wherein the known data are to be inserted.

According to the second embodiment of the present invention, a transmission parameter including information on the processing method of the block processor 303 may be inserted in a portion of the known data region and then transmitted. In this case, a symbol processing method and position of the symbol for the actual transmission parameter symbol are already decided. Also, the position of the transmission parameter symbol should be positioned so as to be transmitted or received earlier than any other data symbols that are to be decoded. Accordingly, the receiving system may detect the transmission symbol before the data symbol decoding process, so as to use the detected transmission symbol for the decoding process.

THIRD EMBODIMENT

Meanwhile, the transmission parameter may also be inserted in the field synchronization segment region and then transmitted. FIG. 29 illustrates a block diagram showing the synchronization multiplexer being expanded in order to allow the transmission parameter to be inserted in the field synchronization segment region. Herein, a signaling multiplexer 261 is further included in the synchronization multiplexer 260. The transmission parameter of the general VSB method is configured of 2 fields. More specifically, each field is configured of one field synchronization segment and 312 data segments. Herein, the first 4 symbols of a data segment correspond to the segment synchronization portion, and the first data segment of each field corresponds to the field synchronization portion.

One field synchronization signal is configured to have the length of one data segment. The data segment synchronization pattern exists in the first 4 symbols, which are then followed by pseudo random sequences PN 511, PN 63, PN 63, and PN 63. The next 24 symbols include information associated with the VSB mode. Additionally, the 24 symbols that include information associated with the VSB mode are followed by the remaining 104 symbols, which are reserved symbols. Herein, the last 12 symbols of a previous segment are copied and positioned as the last 12 symbols in the reserved region. In other words, only the 92 symbols in the field synchronization segment are the symbols that correspond to the actual reserved region.

Therefore, the signaling multiplexer 261 multiplexes the transmission parameter with an already-existing field synchronization segment symbol, so that the transmission parameter can be inserted in the reserved region of the field synchronization segment. Then, the signaling multiplexer 261 outputs the multiplexed transmission parameter to the synchronization multiplexer 260. The synchronization multiplexer 260 multiplexes the segment synchronization symbol, the data symbols, and the new field synchronization segment outputted from the signaling multiplexer 261, thereby configuring a new transmission frame. The transmission frame including the field synchronization segment, wherein the transmission parameter is inserted, is outputted to the transmission unit 270. At this point, the reserved region within the field synchronization segment for inserting the transmission parameter may correspond to a portion of or the entire 92 symbols of the reserved region. Herein, the transmission parameter being inserted in the reserved region may, for example, include information identifying the transmission parameter as the main service data, the mobile service data, or a different type of mobile service data.

If the information on the processing method of the block processor 303 is transmitted as a portion of the transmission parameter, and when the receiving system wishes to perform a decoding process corresponding to the block processor 303, the receiving system should be informed of such information on the block processing method in order to perform the decoding process. Therefore, the information on the processing method of the block processor 303 should already be known prior to the block decoding process. Accordingly, as described in the third embodiment of the present invention, when the transmission parameter having the information on the processing method of the block processor 303 (and/or the group formatter 304) is inserted in the reserved region of the field synchronization signal and then transmitted, the receiving system is capable of detecting the transmission parameter prior to performing the block decoding process on the received signal.

Receiving System

FIG. 30 illustrates a block diagram showing a structure of a digital broadcast receiving system according to the present invention. The digital broadcast receiving system of FIG. 30 uses known data information, which is inserted in the mobile service data section and, then, transmitted by the transmitting system, so as to perform carrier synchronization recovery, frame synchronization recovery, and channel equalization, thereby enhancing the receiving performance. Referring to FIG. 30, the digital broadcast receiving system includes a demodulator 1002, an equalizer 1003, a known data detector 1004, a block decoder 1005, a data deformatter 1006, a RS frame decoder 1007, a derandomizer 1008, a data deinterleaver 1009, a RS decoder 1010, and a data derandomizer 1011. Herein, for simplicity of the description of the present invention, the data deformatter 1006, the RS frame decoder 1007, and the derandomizer 1008 will be collectively referred to as a mobile service data processing unit. And, the data deinterleaver 1009, the RS decoder 1010, and the data derandomizer 1011 will be collectively referred to as a main service data processing unit. For example, if the receiving system corresponds to a mobile transmission receiving system, the main service data processing unit may be omitted.

More specifically, a frequency of a particular channel is tuned and down-converted to an intermediate frequency (IF) signal by a tuner. Then, the down-converted IF data 1001 are outputted to the demodulator 1002 and the known data detector 1004. At this point, the down-converted IF data 1001 pass through an analog/digital converter (ADC) (not shown), which converts pass band analog IF signals to digital IF signals, so as to be inputted to the demodulator 1002 and the known data detector 1004. The demodulator 1002 performs self gain control, carrier recovery, and timing recovery processes on the inputted IF signal, thereby modifying the IF signal to a baseband signal. Then, the demodulator 1002 outputs the digitalized and inputted pass band IF signal to the equalizer 1003 and the known data detector 1004. The equalizer 1003 compensates the distortion of the channel included in the demodulated signal and then outputs the error-compensated signal to the block decoder 1005.

At this point, the known data detector 1004 detects the known sequence place inserted by the transmitting end from the input/output data of the demodulator 1002 (i.e., the data prior to the demodulation process or the data after the demodulation process). Thereafter, the place information (or position indicator) along with the symbol sequence of the known data, which are generated from the detected place, is outputted to the demodulator 1002 and the equalizer 1003. Also, the known data detector 1004 outputs a set of information to the block decoder 1005. This set of information is used to allow the block decoder 1005 of the receiving system to identify the mobile service data that are processed with additional encoding from the transmitting system and the main service data that are not processed with additional encoding. In addition, although the connection status is not shown in FIG. 30, the information detected from the known data detector 1004 may be used throughout the entire receiving system and may also be used in the data deformatter 1006 and the RS frame decoder 1007.

The demodulator 1002 uses the known data (or sequence) position indicator and the known data symbol sequence during the timing and/or carrier recovery, thereby enhancing the demodulating performance. Similarly, the equalizer 1003 uses the known sequence position indicator and the known data symbol sequence so as to enhance the equalizing performance. Moreover, the decoding result of the block decoder 1005 may be fed-back to the equalizer 1003, thereby enhancing the equalizing performance.

Demodulator and Known Sequence Detector within Receiving System

At this point, the transmitting system may periodically insert and transmit known data within a transmission frame, as shown in FIG. 7A and FIG. 8. FIG. 31 illustrates an example of known data sequence being periodically inserted and transmitted in-between actual data by the transmitting system. Referring to FIG. 31, AS represents the number of general data symbols, and BS represents the number of known data symbols. Therefore, BS number of known data symbols are inserted and transmitted at a period of (AS+BS) symbols. Herein, AS may correspond to mobile service data, main service data, or a combination of mobile service data and main service data. In order to be differentiated from the known data, data corresponding to AS will hereinafter be referred to as general data.

Referring to FIG. 31, known data sequence having the same pattern are included in each known data section that is being periodically inserted. Herein, the length of the known data sequence having identical data patterns may be either equal to or different from the length of the entire (or total) known data sequence of the corresponding known data section (or block). If the two lengths are different from one another, the length of the entire known data sequence should be longer than the length of the known data sequence having identical data patterns. In this case, the same known data sequences are included in the entire known data sequence. For example, if a known data pattern F is inserted for channel equalization, each known data section includes at least one pattern F.

Accordingly, when the known data are regularly inserted in-between the valid data as described above, the channel equalizer included in the digital broadcast receiver used the inserted known data as a training sequence, so as to be used either for an accurate decision value or for estimating an impulse response of a channel. Meanwhile, when the same known data are regularly inserted, the known data interval may be used as a guard interval in a channel equalizer according to the present invention. Herein, the guard interval prevents interference that occurs between blocks due to a multiple path channel. This is because the known data of the known data section located at the end portion of the data block of the (AS+BS) symbol, shown in FIG. 31, may be considered to be copied and place before the data block.

The above-described structure is referred to as a cyclic prefix. This structure provides circular convolution to an impulse response in a time domain between a data block transmitted from the digital broadcast transmitting system and a channel. Accordingly, this facilitates the channel equalizer of a digital broadcast receiving system to perform channel equalization in a frequency domain by using a fast fourier transform (FFT) and an inverse fast fourier transform (IFFT). More specifically, when viewed in the frequency domain, the data block received by the digital broadcast receiving system is expressed as a multiplication of the data block and the channel impulse response. Therefore, when performing the channel equalization, by multiplying the inverse of the channel in the frequency domain, the channel equalization may be performed more easily.

The known data detector 1004 detects the position of the known data being periodically inserted and transmitted as described above. At the same time, the known data detector 1004 may also estimate initial frequency offset during the process of detecting known data. In this case, the demodulator 1002 may estimate with more accuracy carrier frequency offset from the information on the known data position (or known sequence position indicator) and initial frequency offset estimation value, thereby compensating the estimated initial frequency offset.

FIG. 32 is a flow chart illustrating a method of detecting positions of known data according to an embodiment of the present invention, when the known data are transmitted in the same structure as that shown in FIG. 8. The known sequence detector 1004 initially detects the position of the first known data region using a plurality of first known data patterns included in the first known data region (Step 2001). At this point, since the known sequence detector 1004 is well-informed of the data frame structure, when the position of the first known data region is detected, the known sequence detector 1004 can estimate the position of the field synchronization segment of a corresponding data group, which is positioned chronologically before the first known data region, by counting symbols or segments based upon the first known data region position (Step 2002). Also, the known sequence detector 1004 can further estimate positions of the second, third, fourth, and fifth known data regions, which are positioned chronologically after the first known data region, by counting symbols or segments based upon the first known data region position (Step 2003).

The estimated position information of the field synchronization segment and known data regions are provided to the demodulator 1002 and the equalizer 1003. For example, the position information of the synchronization segment and the second known data pattern region of each known data region, wherein the second known data pattern region is assigned with 1424 symbols, may be provided to the equalizer 1003. In this case, it is assumed that the equalizer 1003 stores in advance the field synchronization data, which are to be inserted in the field synchronization region, and the second known data pattern, which is inserted in the second known data pattern region, in order to estimate channel the impulse response (CIR) during the field synchronization section and the known data section, wherein the second known data pattern is to be inserted. Also, during the process of detecting the position of the first known data region, the known sequence detector 1004 may estimate an initial frequency offset from the first known data pattern. In this case, the demodulator 1002 may estimate and compensate the known data position information and the initial frequency offset estimation value with more accuracy.

FIG. 33 illustrates a detailed block diagram of a demodulator according to the present invention. Referring to FIG. 33, the demodulator includes a phase splitter 1010, a numerically controlled oscillator (NCO) 1020, a first multiplier 1030, a resampler 1040, a second multiplier 1050, a matched filter 1060, a DC remover 1070, a timing recovery unit 1080, a carrier recovery unit 1090, and a phase compensator 1110. Herein, the known sequence detector 1004 includes a known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 for estimating known data information and initial frequency offset. Also referring to FIG. 33, the phase splitter 1010 receives a pass band digital signal and splits the received signal into a pass band digital signal of a real number element and a pass band digital signal of an imaginary number element both having a phase of 90 degrees between one another. In other words, the pass band digital signal is split into complex signals. The split portions of the pass band digital signal are then outputted to the first multiplier 1030. Herein, the real number signal outputted from the phase splitter 1010 will be referred to as an ‘I’ signal, and the imaginary number signal outputted from the phase splitter 1010 will be referred to as a ‘Q’ signal, for simplicity of the description of the present invention.

The first multiplier 1030 multiplies the I and Q pass band digital signals, which are outputted from the phase splitter 1010, to a complex signal having a frequency proportional to a constant being outputted from the NCO 1020, thereby changing the I and Q pass band digital signals to baseband digital complex signals. Then, the baseband digital signals of the first multiplier 1030 are inputted to the resampler 1040. The resampler 1040 resamples the signals being outputted from the first multiplier 1030 so that the signal corresponds to the timing clock provided by the timing recovery unit 1080. Thereafter, the resampler 1040 outputs the resampled signals to the second multiplier 1050.

For example, when the analog/digital converter uses a 25 MHz fixed oscillator, the baseband digital signal having a frequency of 25 MHz, which is created by passing through the analog/digital converter, the phase splitter 1010, and the first multiplier 1030, is processed with an interpolation process by the resampler 1040. Thus, the interpolated signal is recovered to a baseband digital signal having a frequency twice that of the receiving signal of a symbol clock (i.e., a frequency of 21.524476 MHz). Alternatively, if the analog/digital converter uses the timing clock of the timing recovery unit 1080 as the sampling frequency (i.e., if the analog/digital converter uses a variable frequency) in order to perform an A/D conversion process, the resampler 1040 is not required and may be omitted.

The second multiplier 1050 multiplies an output frequency of the carrier recovery unit 1090 with the output of the resampler 1040 so as to compensate any remaining carrier included in the output signal of the resampler 1040. Thereafter, the compensated carrier is outputted to the matched filter 1060 and the timing recovery unit 1080. The signal matched-filtered by the matched filter 1060 is inputted to the DC remover 1070, the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1, and the carrier recovery unit 1090.

The known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 detects the place (or position) of the known data sequences that are being periodically or non-periodically transmitted. Simultaneously, the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 estimates an initial frequency offset during the known sequence detection process. Additionally, the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 may also extract and output a group valid indicator, which is a group valid information, and a burst valid indication, which is a burst valid information. More specifically, while the transmission data frame is being received, as shown in FIG. 7A and FIG. 8, the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 detects the position (or place) of the known data included in the transmission data frame. Then, the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 outputs the detected information on the known data place (i.e., a known sequence position indicator) to the timing recovery unit 1080, the carrier recovery unit 1090, and the phase compensator 1110 of the demodulator 1002 and the equalizer 1003. Furthermore, the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 estimates the initial frequency offset, which is then outputted to the carrier recovery unit 1090. At this point, the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 may either receive the output of the matched filter 1060 or receive the output of the resampler 1040. This may be optionally decided depending upon the design of the system designer.

The timing recovery unit 1080 uses the output of the second multiplier 1050 and the known sequence position indicator detected from the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1, so as to detect the timing error and, then, to output a sampling clock being in proportion with the detected timing error to the resampler 1040, thereby adjusting the sampling timing of the resampler 1040. At this point, the timing recovery unit 1080 may receive the output of the matched filter 1060 instead of the output of the second multiplier 1050. This may also be optionally decided depending upon the design of the system designer.

Meanwhile, the DC remover 1070 removes a pilot tone signal (i.e., DC signal), which has been inserted by the transmitting system, from the matched-filtered signal. Thereafter, the DC remover 1070 outputs the processed signal to the phase compensator 1110. The phase compensator 1110 uses the data having the DC removed by the DC remover 1070 and the known sequence position indicator detected by the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 to estimate the frequency offset and, then, to compensate the phase change included in the output of the DC remover 1070. The data having its phase change compensated are inputted to the equalizer 1003. Herein, the phase compensator 1110 is optional. If the phase compensator 1110 is not provided, then the output of the DC remover 1070 is inputted to the equalizer 1003 instead.

FIG. 34 includes detailed block diagrams of the timing recovery unit 1080, the carrier recovery unit 1090, and the phase compensator 1110 of the demodulator. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the timing recovery unit 1080 includes a decimator 1081, a buffer 1082, a timing error detector 1083, a loop filter 1084, a holder 1085, and a NCO 1086. The carrier recovery unit 1090 includes a buffer 1091, a frequency offset estimator 1092, a loop filter 1093, a holder 1094, an adder 1095, and a NCO 1096. Herein, a decimator may be included before the buffer 1091. Finally, the phase compensator 1110 includes a buffer 1111, a frequency offset estimator 1112, a holder 1113, a NCO 1114, and a multiplier 1115. Furthermore, a decimator 1200 may be included between the phase compensator 1110 and the equalizer 1003. The decimator 1200 may be outputted in front of the DC remover 1070 instead of at the outputting end of the phase compensator 1110.

Herein, the decimators correspond to components required when a signal being inputted to the demodulator is oversampled to N times by the analog/digital converter. More specifically, the integer N represents the sampling rate of the received signal. For example, when the input signal is oversampled to 2 times (i.e., when N=2) by the analog/digital converter, this indicates that two samples are included in one symbol. In this case, each of the decimators corresponds to a ½ decimator. Depending upon whether or not the oversampling process of the received signal has been performed, the signal may bypass the decimators.

Meanwhile, the buffer 1091 of the carrier recovery unit 1090 may receive either the data inputted to the matched filter 1060 or the data outputted from the matched filter 1060 and, then, temporarily store the received data. Thereafter, the temporarily stored data are outputted to the frequency offset estimator 1092. If a decimator is provided in front of the buffer 1091, the input data or output data of the matched filter 1060 are decimated by the decimator at a decimation rate of 1/N. Thereafter, the decimated data are outputted to the buffer 1091. For example, when the input data or output data of the matched filter 1060 are oversampled to 2 times (i.e., when N=2), this indicates that the input data or output data of the matched filter 1060 are decimated at a rate of ½ by the decimator 1081 and then outputted to the buffer 1091. More specifically, when a decimator is provided in front of the buffer 1091, the carrier recovery unit 1090 operates in symbol units. Alternatively, if a decimator is not provided, the carrier recovery unit 1090 operates in oversampling units.

The frequency offset estimator 1092 uses the input data or output data of the matched filter 1060 and the known sequence position indicator outputted from the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 in order to estimate the frequency offset. Then, the estimated frequency offset is outputted to the loop filter 1093. More specifically, the frequency offset estimator 1092 estimates the frequency offset from the known data sequence prior to or after being processed with matched filtering. Then, the frequency offset estimator 1092 outputs the estimated frequency offset to the loop filter 1093. Therefore, the estimated frequency offset value is obtained once every repetition period of the known data sequence. The loop filter 1093 performs low pass filtering on the frequency offset value estimated by the frequency offset estimator 1092 and outputs the low pass-filtered frequency offset value to the holder 1094. The holder 1094 holds (or maintains) the low pass-filtered frequency offset value during a pre-determined known data sequence cycle period and outputs the frequency offset value to the adder 1095. Herein, the positions of the loop filter 1093 and the holder 1094 may be switched from one to the other. Furthermore, the function of the holder 1085 may be included in the loop filter 1093, and, accordingly, the holder 1094 may be omitted.

The adder 1095 adds the value of the initial frequency offset estimated by the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 to the frequency offset value outputted from the loop filter 1093 (or the holder 1094). Thereafter, the added offset value is outputted to the NCO 1096. Herein, if the adder 1095 is designed to also receive the constant being inputted to the NCO 1020, the NCO 1020 and the first multiplier 1030 may be omitted. In this case, the second multiplier 1050 may simultaneously perform changing signals to baseband signals and removing remaining carrier.

The NCO 1096 generates a complex signal corresponding to the frequency offset outputted from the adder 1095, which is then outputted to the second multiplier 1050. Herein, the NCO 1096 may include a ROM. In this case, the NCO 1096 generates a compensation frequency corresponding to the frequency offset being outputted from the adder 1095. Then, the NCO 1096 reads a complex cosine corresponding to the compensation frequency from the ROM, which is then outputted to the second multiplier 1050. The second multiplier 1050 multiplies the output of the NCO 1094 included in the carrier recovery unit 1090 to the output of the resampler 1040, so as to remove the carrier offset included in the output signal of the resampler 1040.

FIG. 35 illustrates a detailed block diagram of the frequency offset estimator 1092 of the carrier recovery unit 1090 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the frequency offset estimator 1092 operates in accordance with the known sequence position indicator detected from the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1. At this point, if the input data or output data of the matched filter 1060 are inputted through the decimator, the frequency offset estimator 1092 operates in symbol units. Alternatively, if a decimator is not provided, the frequency offset estimator 1092 operates in oversampling units. In the example given in the description of the present invention, the frequency offset estimator 1092 operates in symbol units. Referring to FIG. 35, the frequency offset estimator 1092 includes a controller 1310, a first N symbol buffer 1301, a K symbol delay 1302, a second N symbol buffer 1303, a conjugator 1304, a multiplier 1305, an accumulator 1306, a phase detector 1307, a multiplier 1308, and a multiplexer 1309. The frequency offset estimator 1092 having the above-described structure, as shown in FIG. 35, will now be described in detail with respect to an operation example during a known data section.

The first N symbol buffer 1301 may store a maximum of N number of symbol being inputted thereto. The symbol data that are temporarily stored in the first N symbol buffer 1301 are then inputted to the multiplier 1305. At the same time, the inputted symbol is inputted to the K symbol delay 1302 so as to be delayed by K symbols. Thereafter, the delayed symbol passes through the second N symbol buffer 1303 so as to be conjugated by the conjugator 1304. Thereafter, the conjugated symbol is inputted to the multiplier 1305. The multiplier 1305 multiplies the output of the first N symbol buffer 1301 and the output of the conjugator 1304. Then, the multiplier 1305 outputs the multiplied result to the accumulator 1306. Subsequently, the accumulator 1306 accumulates the output of the multiplier 1305 during N symbol periods, thereby outputting the accumulated result to the phase detector 1307.

The phase detector 1307 extracts the corresponding phase information from the output of the accumulator 1306, which is then outputted to the multiplier 1308. The multiplier 1308 then divides the phase information by K, thereby outputting the divided result to the multiplexer 1309. Herein, the result of the phase information divided by becomes the frequency offset estimation value. More specifically, at the point where the input of the known data ends or at a desired point, the frequency offset estimator 1092 accumulates during an N symbol period multiplication of the complex conjugate of N number of the input data stored in the first N symbol buffer 1301 and the complex conjugate of the N number of the input data that are delayed by K symbols and stored in the second N symbol buffer 1303. Thereafter, the accumulated value is divided by K, thereby extracting the frequency offset estimation value.

Based upon a control signal of the controller 1310, the multiplexer 1309 selects either the output of the multiplier 1308 or ‘0’ and, then, outputs the selected result as the final frequency offset estimation value. The controller 1300 receives the known data sequence position indicator from the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 in order to control the output of the multiplexer 1309. More specifically, the controller 1300 determines based upon the known data sequence position indicator whether the frequency offset estimation value being outputted from the multiplier 1308 is valid. If the controller 1300 determines that the frequency offset estimation value is valid, the multiplexer 1309 selects the output of the multiplier 1308. Alternatively, if the controller 1300 determines that the frequency offset estimation value is invalid, the controller 1300 generates a control signal so that the multiplexer 1309 can select ‘0’. At this point, it is preferable that the input signals stored in the first N symbol buffer 1301 and in the second N symbol buffer 1303 correspond to signals each being transmitted by the same known data and passing through almost the same channel. Otherwise, due to the influence of the transmission channel, the frequency offset estimating performance may be largely deteriorated.

Further, the values N and K of the frequency offset estimator 1092 (shown in FIG. 35) may be diversely decided. This is because a particular portion of the known data that are identically repeated may be used herein. For example, when the data having the structure described in FIG. 31 are being transmitted, N may be set as BS (i.e., N=BS), and K may be set as (AS+BS) (i.e., K=AS+BS)). The frequency offset estimation value range of the frequency offset estimator 1092 is decided in accordance with the value K. If the value K is large, then the frequency offset estimation value range becomes smaller. Alternatively, if the value K is small, then the frequency offset estimation value range becomes larger. Therefore, when the data having the structure of FIG. 31 is transmitted, and if the repetition cycle (AS+BS) of the known data is long, then the frequency offset estimation value range becomes smaller.

In this case, even if the initial frequency offset is estimated by the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1, and if the estimated value is compensated by the second multiplier 1050, the remaining frequency offset after being compensated will exceed the estimation range of the frequency offset estimator 1092. In order to overcome such problems, the known data sequence that is regularly transmitted may be configured of a repetition of a same data portion by using a cyclic extension process. For example, if the known data sequence shown in FIG. 31 is configured of two identical portions having the length of BS/2, then the N and K values of the frequency offset estimator 1092 (shown in FIG. 35) may be respectively set as B/2 and B/2 (i.e., N=BS/2 and K=BS/2). In this case, the estimation value range may become larger than when using repeated known data.

Meanwhile, the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 detects the place (o position) of the known data sequences that are being periodically or non-periodically transmitted. Simultaneously, the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 estimates an initial frequency offset during the known sequence detection process. The known data sequence position indicator detected by the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 is outputted to the timing recovery unit 1080, the carrier recovery unit 1090, and the phase compensator 1110 of the demodulator 1002, and to the equalizer 1003. Thereafter, the estimated initial frequency offset is outputted to the carrier recovery unit 1090. At this point, the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 may either receive the output of the matched filter 1060 or receive the output of the resampler 1040. This may be optionally decided depending upon the design of the system designer. Herein, the frequency offset estimator shown in FIG. 35 may be directly applied in the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 or in the phase compensator 1110 of the frequency offset estimator.

FIG. 36 illustrates a detailed block diagram showing a known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator according to an embodiment of the present invention. More specifically, FIG. 36 illustrates an example of an initial frequency offset being estimated along with the known sequence position indicator. Herein, FIG. 36 shows an example of an inputted signal being oversampled to N times of its initial state. In other words, N represents the sampling rate of a received signal. Referring to FIG. 36, the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator includes N number of partial correlators 1411 to 141N configured in parallel, a known data place detector and frequency offset decider 1420, a known data extractor 1430, a buffer 1440, a multiplier 1450, a NCO 1460, a frequency offset estimator 1470, and an adder 1480. Herein, the first partial correlator 1411 consists of a 1/N decimator, and a partial correlator. The second partial correlator 1412 consists of a 1 sample delay, a 1/N decimator, and a partial correlator. And, the N^(th) partial correlator 141N consists of a N−1 sample delay, a 1/N decimator, and a partial correlator. These are used to match (or identify) the phase of each of the samples within the oversampled symbol with the phase of the original (or initial) symbol, and to decimate the samples of the remaining phases, thereby performing partial correlation on each sample. More specifically, the input signal is decimated at a rate of 1/N for each sampling phase, so as to pass through each partial correlator.

For example, when the input signal is oversampled to 2 times (i.e., when N=2), this indicates that two samples are included in one signal. In this case, two partial correlators (e.g., 1411 and 1412) are required, and each 1/N decimator becomes a ½ decimator. At this point, the 1/N decimator of the first partial correlator 1411 decimates (or removes), among the input samples, the samples located in-between symbol places (or positions). Then, the corresponding 1/N decimator outputs the decimated sample to the partial correlator. Furthermore, the 1 sample delay of the second partial correlator 1412 delays the input sample by 1 sample (i.e., performs a 1 sample delay on the input sample) and outputs the delayed input sample to the 1/N decimator. Subsequently, among the samples inputted from the 1 sample delay, the 1/N decimator of the second partial correlator 1412 decimates (or removes) the samples located in-between symbol places (or positions). Thereafter, the corresponding 1/N decimator outputs the decimated sample to the partial correlator.

After each predetermined period of the VSB symbol, each of the partial correlators outputs a correlation value and an estimation value of the coarse frequency offset estimated at that particular moment to the known data place detector and frequency offset decider 1420. The known data place detector and frequency offset decider 1420 stores the output of the partial correlators corresponding to each sampling phase during a data group cycle or a pre-decided cycle. Thereafter, the known data place detector and frequency offset decider 1420 decides a position (or place) corresponding to the highest correlation value, among the stored values, as the place (or position) for receiving the known data. Simultaneously, the known data place detector and frequency offset decider 1420 finally decides the estimation value of the frequency offset estimated at the moment corresponding to the highest correlation value as the coarse frequency offset value of the receiving system.

The known sequence position indicator corresponds to the position information (or indicator) of the first known data region, wherein the first known data pattern is inserted. The position of a field synchronization segment position and the positions of the second to fifth known data regions may be estimated from the known sequence position indicator. Additionally, the position of the second known data pattern region having 1424 symbols assigned thereto, which is included in each known data region, may also be estimated. At this point, the known sequence position indicator is inputted to the known data extractor 1430, the timing recovery unit 1080, the carrier recovery unit 1090, the phase compensator 1110, and the equalizer 1003, and the coarse frequency offset is inputted to the adder 1480 and the NCO 1460.

In the meantime, while the N numbers of partial correlators 1411 to 141N detect the known data place (or known sequence position) and estimate the coarse frequency offset, the buffer 1440 temporarily stores the received data and outputs the temporarily stored data to the known data extractor 1430. The known data extractor 1430 uses the known sequence position indicator, which is outputted from the known data place detector and frequency offset decider 1420, so as to extract the known data from the output of the buffer 1440. Thereafter, the known data extractor 1430 outputs the extracted data to the multiplier 1450. The NCO 1460 generates a complex signal corresponding to the coarse frequency offset being outputted from the known data place detector and frequency offset decider 1420. Then, the NCO 1460 outputs the generated complex signal to the multiplier 1450.

The multiplier 1450 multiplies the complex signal of the NCO 1460 to the known data being outputted from the known data extractor 1430, thereby outputting the known data having the coarse frequency offset compensated to the frequency offset estimator 1470. The frequency offset estimator 1470 estimates a fine frequency offset from the known data having the coarse frequency offset compensated. Subsequently, the frequency offset estimator 1470 outputs the estimated fine frequency offset to the adder 1480. The adder 1480 adds the coarse frequency offset to the fine frequency offset. Thereafter, the adder 1480 decides the added result as a final initial frequency offset, which is then outputted to the adder 1095 of the carrier recovery unit 1090 included in the demodulator 1002. More specifically, during the process of acquiring initial synchronization, the present invention may estimate and use the coarse frequency offset as well as the fine frequency offset, thereby enhancing the estimation performance of the initial frequency offset.

It is assumed that the known data is inserted within the data group and then transmitted, as shown in FIG. 8. Then, the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 may use a correlation between the plurality of first known data patterns within the first known data region, so as to estimate the initial frequency offset. The field synchronization position indicator, which is estimated by the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1, and the known sequence position indicator, which is periodically inserted within region A, (e.g., the position indicator of the second known data pattern region that is periodically inserted in each known data region) are inputted to the timing error detector 1083 of the timing error recovery unit 1080, to the frequency offset estimator 1092 of the carrier recovery unit 1090, to the frequency offset estimator 1112 of the phase compensator 1110, and to the equalizer 1003.

FIG. 37 illustrates a block diagram showing the structure of one of the partial correlators shown in FIG. 36. During the step of detecting known data, since a frequency offset is included in the received signal, each partial correlator divides the known data, which is known according to an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system, to K number of parts each having an L symbol length, thereby correlating each divided part with the corresponding part of the received signal. In order to do so, each partial correlator includes K number of phase and size detector 1511 to 151K each formed in parallel, an adder 1520, and a coarse frequency offset estimator 1530.

The first phase and size detector 1511 includes an L symbol buffer 1511-2, a multiplier 1511-3, an accumulator 1511-4, and a squarer 1511-5. Herein, the first phase and size detector 1511 calculates the correlation value of the known data having a first L symbol length among the K number of sections. Also, the second phase and size detector 1512 includes an L symbol delay 1512-1, an L symbol buffer 1512-2, a multiplier 1512-3, an accumulator 1512-4, and a squarer 1512-5. Herein, the second phase and size detector 1512 calculates the correlation value of the known data having a second L symbol length among the K number of sections. Finally, the N^(th) phase and size detector 151K includes a (K−1)L symbol delay 151K−1, an L symbol buffer 151K−2, a multiplier 151K−3, an accumulator 151K−4, and a squarer 151K−5. Herein, the N^(th) phase and size detector 151K calculates the correlation value of the known data having an N^(th) L symbol length among the K number of sections.

Referring to FIG. 37, {P0, P1, . . . , PKL−1} each being multiplied with the received signal in the multiplier represents the known data known by both the transmitting system and the receiving system (i.e., the reference known data generated from the receiving system). And, * represents a complex conjugate. For example, in the first phase and size detector 1511, the signal outputted from the 1/N decimator of the first partial correlator 1411, shown in FIG. 36, is temporarily stored in the L symbol buffer 1511-2 of the first phase and size detector 1511 and then inputted to the multiplier 1511-3. The multiplier 1511-3 multiplies the output of the L symbol buffer 1511-2 with the complex conjugate of the known data parts P0, P1, . . . , PL−1, each having a first L symbol length among the known K number of sections. Then, the multiplied result is outputted to the accumulator 1511-4. During the L symbol period, the accumulator 1511-4 accumulates the output of the multiplier 1511-3 and, then, outputs the accumulated value to the squarer 1511-5 and the coarse frequency offset estimator 1530. The output of the accumulator 1511-4 is a correlation value having a phase and a size. Accordingly, the squarer 1511-5 calculates an absolute value of the output of the multiplier 1511-4 and squares the calculated absolute value, thereby obtaining the size of the correlation value. The obtained size is then inputted to the adder 1520.

The adder 1520 adds the output of the squarers corresponding to each size and phase detector 1511 to 151K. Then, the adder 1520 outputs the added result to the known data place detector and frequency offset decider 1420. Also, the coarse frequency offset estimator 1530 receives the output of the accumulator corresponding to each size and phase detector 1511 to 151K, so as to estimate the coarse frequency offset at each corresponding sampling phase. Thereafter, the coarse frequency offset estimator 1530 outputs the estimated offset value to the known data place detector and frequency offset decider 1420.

When the K number of inputs that are outputted from the accumulator of each phase and size detector 1511 to 151K are each referred to as {Z₀, Z₁, . . . , Z_(K−1)}, the output of the coarse frequency offset estimator 1530 may be obtained by using Equation 6 shown below.

$\begin{matrix} {\omega_{0} = {\frac{1}{L}\arg \left\{ {\sum\limits_{n = 1}^{K - 1}{\left( \frac{Z_{n}}{Z_{n}} \right)\left( \frac{Z_{n - 1}}{Z_{n - 1}} \right)^{*}}} \right\}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 6} \end{matrix}$

The known data place detector and frequency offset decider 1420 stores the output of the partial correlator corresponding to each sampling phase during an enhanced data group cycle or a pre-decided cycle. Then, among the stored correlation values, the known data place detector and frequency offset decider 1420 decides the place (or position) corresponding to the highest correlation value as the place for receiving the known data. Furthermore, the known data place detector and frequency offset decider 1420 decides the estimated value of the frequency offset taken (or estimated) at the point of the highest correlation value as the coarse frequency offset value of the receiving system. For example, if the output of the partial correlator corresponding to the second partial correlator 1412 is the highest value, the place corresponding to the highest value is decided as the known data place. Thereafter, the coarse frequency offset estimated by the second partial correlator 1412 is decided as the final coarse frequency offset, which is then outputted to the demodulator 1002.

Meanwhile, the output of the second multiplier 1050 is temporarily stored in the decimator 1081 and the buffer 1082 both included in the timing recovery unit 1080. Subsequently, the temporarily stored output data are inputted to the timing error detector 1083 through the decimator 1081 and the buffer 1082. Assuming that the output of the second multiplier 1050 is oversampled to N times its initial state, the decimator 1081 decimates the output of the second multiplier 1050 at a decimation rate of 1/N. Then, the 1/N-decimated data are inputted to the buffer 1082. In other words, the decimator 1081 performs decimation on the input signal in accordance with a VSB symbol cycle. Furthermore, the decimator 1081 may also receive the output of the matched filter 1060 instead of the output of the second multiplier 1050.

The timing error detector 1083 uses the data prior to or after being processed with matched-filtering and the known sequence position indicator outputted from the known data detector and initial frequency offset estimator 1004-1 in order to detect a timing error. Thereafter, the detected timing error is outputted to the loop filter 1084. More specifically, the timing error detector 1083 detects timing error from the known data sequence prior to or after being processed with matched filtering. Then, the timing error detector 1083 outputs the detected timing error to the loop filter 1084. Accordingly, the detected timing error information is obtained once during each repetition cycle of the known data sequence.

For example, if a known data sequence having the same pattern is periodically inserted and transmitted, as shown in FIG. 31, the timing error detector 1083 may use the known data in order to detect the timing error. There exists a plurality of methods for detecting timing error by using the known data. In the example of the present invention, the timing error may be detected by using a correlation characteristic between the known data and the received data in the time domain, the known data being already known in accordance with a pre-arranged agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system. The timing error may also be detected by using the correlation characteristic of the two known data types being received in the frequency domain. Then, the detected timing error is outputted. In another example, a spectral lining method may be applied in order to detect the timing error. Herein, the spectral lining method corresponds to a method of detecting timing error by using sidebands of the spectrum included in the received signal.

The loop filter 1084 filters the timing error detected by the timing error detector 1083 and, then, outputs the filtered timing error to the holder 1085. The holder 1085 holds (or maintains) the timing error filtered and outputted from the loop filter 1084 during a pre-determined known data sequence cycle period and outputs the processed timing error to the NCO 1086. Herein, the positioning order of the loop filter 1084 and the holder 1085 may be switched from one another. In addition, the function of the holder 1085 may be included in the loop filter 1084, and, accordingly, the holder 1085 may be omitted. The NCO 1086 accumulates the timing error outputted from the holder 1085. Thereafter, the NCO 1086 outputs the phase element (i.e., a sampling clock) of the accumulated timing error to the resampler 1040, thereby adjusting the sampling timing of the resampler 1040.

FIG. 38 illustrates a timing recovery unit according to another embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 38, the timing recovery unit 1080 includes a first timing error detector 1611, a second timing error detector 1612, a multiplexer 1613, a loop filter 1614, and an NCO 1615. When the input signal is divided into a region including known data and a region not including any known data, the method for detecting timing error may differ based upon whether or not the known data is included. Also, a suitable timing error detector may be used, based upon whether or not the known data is included. Therefore, it would be efficient and advantageous to apply the example shown in FIG. 38 when the transmitted input signal is divided into a region having known data of a predetermined length inserted in a pre-decided position thereof (i.e., a first region) and a region having no known data included therein (i.e., a second region).

For example, it is assumed that the first timing error detector 1611 detects a first timing error using a sideband of a spectrum corresponding to an input signal, and that the second timing error detector 1612 detects a second timing error using the known data. Accordingly, the multiplexer 1613 may be designed to select the first timing error for the first region and to select the second timing error for the second region, thereby outputting the selected timing errors to the loop filter 1614. Alternatively, the multiplexer 1613 may also be designed to output both of the first and second timing errors for the first region having the known data inserted therein. By using the known data in the first region, a more reliable timing error may be detected, thereby enabling the timing clock to be recovered with more stability.

There is a plurality of methods for detecting timing error using the known data. In the description of the present invention, two methods for detecting timing error will be disclosed. The first method relates to detecting timing error using a correlation characteristic in the time domain between known data pre-known to a transmitting system and a receiving system (reference known data) and the known data actually received by the receiving system. And, the second method relates to detecting a timing error using a correlation characteristic in the frequency domain between two sets of known data actually received by the receiving system.

FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 respectively illustrate examples of detecting timing error by calculating a correlation value between known data pre-known to the transmitting system and the receiving system (i.e., reference known data generated from the receiving system) and the received signal. Firstly, FIG. 39( a) illustrates an example of shifting an entire known data sequence, which is repeated for each data block cycle period, in accordance with the received signal (or known data) sequence, thereby calculating the correlation. At this point, the correlation value between the known data sequence and the actually received signal (or known data) corresponds to a maximum value or a peak value of the last symbol position of the known data sequence included in the received signal, as shown in FIG. 39( b).

FIG. 40( a) illustrates an example of calculating correlation values by dividing the known data sequence into a plurality of portions. In this case, the peak values of the correlation values of the known data are generated at the last symbol position corresponding to the divided portion of each known data sequence. Then, the by adding the generated peak values to a single value, a final peak value may be calculated. FIG. 40( b) illustrates a plurality of correlation values and a final peak value, which corresponds to the added value of the plurality of correlation values, when the known data sequence is divided into three portions.

The timing error may be calculated from a peak position of correlation values. When a single correlation value is calculated using an entire known data sequence, as shown in FIG. 39, the timing error may be detected once for each data block cycle period. However, when the known data signal is divided into a plurality of portions so as to calculate the correlation values between the divided known data portions and the received signal, as shown in FIG. 40, a more accurate timing error may be calculated (or obtained), in case the level of correlation for the entire known data sequence decreases. In this case, a number of peak correlation values corresponding to the number of divided known data portions may be obtained.

The use of a final correlation value which is obtained by adding a plurality of correlation values of divided portions of a received known data sequence may reduce the carrier wave frequency error. In addition, the process time for the timing recovery can be greatly reduced when the plurality of correlation values are used to calculate the timing error. For example, when the reference known data sequence, which is pre-known to the transmitting system and receiving system, is divided into K number of portions, K number of correlation values between the K number of portions of the reference known data sequence and the corresponding divided portions of the received known data sequence can be calculated, or any combination(s) of the correlation values can be used. Therefore, when using the entire known data sequence, the dispersion of the timing error detection values may be reduced but the application cycle period may be extended. However, when using the divided portions of the known data sequence, even though the dispersion of the timing error detection values may be slightly increased, as compared to when using the entire known data sequence, the application cycle period may be reduced.

The timing error can be calculated from the peak value of the correlation values. The timing error is obtained for each data block if an entire portion of the known data sequence is used, as shown in FIG. 41. On the other hand, if K number of divided portions of the known data sequence are used for correlation calculation, as shown in FIG. 40, K number of correlation values and corresponding peak values can be obtained. This indicates that the timing error can be detected K number of times.

A method of detecting a timing error using the correlation between the reference known data and the received known data, shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, will now be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 41. Referring to FIG. 41, the bold dots respectively indicate correlation values between the reference known data and the received known data, and the solid line broadly connects the flow of the dots. The dots respectively indicate correlation values corresponding to data samples sampled at a rate two times greater than the symbol clock. Referring to FIG. 41, when the random data effect is excluded, when there is no noise, and when there is no timing clock error, the correlation values between the reference known data and the received known data are horizontally symmetrical with the peak value as the axis, as shown by the solid line of FIG. 41. However, if a timing phase error exists, the correlation values adjacent to the peak value are no longer symmetrical. Therefore, the timing error can be obtained by using a value in proportion with a difference between the correlation values before and after the peak value.

FIG. 42 illustrates an example of the timing error detector detecting timing error in the time domain using a correlation value between the above-described known data and received signal. Referring to FIG. 42, the timing error detector includes a correlator 1701, a down sampler 1702, an absolute value calculator 1703, a delay 1704, and a subtractor 1705. The correlator 1701 receives a known data sequence sampled at a rate at least two times higher than the symbol clock frequency and calculates the correlation values between the received known data sequence and a reference known data sequence. The down sampler 1702 performs down sampling on the correlation values and obtains samples having a symbol frequency. For example, if the data inputted to the correlator 1701 are pre-sampled at a sampling rate of 2, then the down sampler 1702 performs down sampling at a rate of ½ to obtain samples having the symbol frequency. The correlation value of the down sampler 1702 is inputted to the absolute value calculator 1703. The absolute value calculator 1703 calculates absolute values (or square values) of the down-sampled correlation values. These absolute values are inputted to the delay 1704 and the subtractor 1705. The delay 1704 delays the absolute values for a symbol. Then, the subtractor 1705 outputs a timing error by subtracting the delayed absolute value from the values outputted from the absolute value calculator 1703. The difference between the outputted values corresponds to the value proportional to the timing phase error.

The arrangement of the correlator 1701, the down sampler 1702, the absolute value calculator 1703, and the delay 1704, and the subtractor 1705, shown in FIG. 42, can be modified. For example, the timing phase error can be calculated in the order of the down sampler 1702, the correlator 1701, and the absolute value calculator 1703, or in the order of the correlator 1701, the absolute value calculator 1703, and the down sampler 1702.

The timing error can also be obtained using the frequency characteristic of the known data. When there is a timing frequency error, a phase of the input signal increases at a fixed slope as the frequency of the signal increases and this slope is different for current and next data block. Therefore, the timing error can be calculated based on the frequency characteristic of two different known data blocks.

FIG. 43 illustrates an example of detecting timing frequency error using a frequency characteristic of the above-described known data. Referring to FIG. 43, a current known data sequence (right) and a previous known data sequence (left) are converted into first and second frequency domain signals, respectively, using a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) algorithm. The conjugate value of the first frequency domain signal is then multiplied with the second frequency domain signal in order to obtain the correlation value between two frequency domain signals. In other words, the correlation between the frequency value of the previous known data sequence and the frequency value of the current known data sequence is used to detect a phase change between the known data blocks for each frequency. Accordingly, the phase distortion of a channel can be eliminated.

The frequency response of a complex VSB signal does not have a full symmetric distribution as shown in FIG. 41. Rather, its distribution is a left or right half of the distribution and the frequency domain correlation values also have a half distribution. In order to obtain the phase difference between the frequency domain correlation values, the frequency domain having the correlation values can be divided into two sub-areas and a phase of a combined correlation value in each sub-area can be obtained. Thereafter, the difference between the phases of sub-areas can be used to calculate a timing frequency error. When a phase of a combined correlation values is used for each frequency, the magnitude of each correlation value is proportional to reliability and a phase component of each correlation value is reflected to the final phase component in proportion to the magnitude.

FIG. 44 illustrates another example of detecting timing error shown in FIG. 43. Referring to FIG. 44, the timing error detector includes a fast fourier transform (FFT) unit 1801, a first delay 1802, a conjugator 1803, a multiplier 1804, an adder 1805, a phase extractor 1806, a second delay 1807, and a subtractor 1808. The first delay 1802 delays for one data block and the second delay 1807 delays for ¼ data block. One data block includes a frequency response of a sequence of N number of known data symbol sequences. When a known data region is known and the data symbols are received, the FFT unit 1801 converts complex values of consecutive N number of known data symbol sequences into complex values in the frequency domain. The first delay 1802 delays the frequency domain complex values for a time corresponding to one data block. The conjugator 1803 generates conjugate values of the delayed complex values. The multiplier 1804 multiplies the current block of known data outputted from the FFT unit 1801 with the previous block of known data outputted from the conjugator 1803. The output of the multiplier 1804 represents frequency region correlation values within a known data block.

Since the complex VSB data exist only on half of the frequency domain, the adder 1805 divides a data region in the known data block into two sub-regions and adds (or accumulates) correlation values for each sub-region. The phase detector 1806 detects a phase of the accumulated correlation value for each significant sub-region. The second delay 1807 delays the detected phase for a time corresponding to a ¼ data block. The subtractor 1808 obtains a phase difference between the delayed phase by ¼ data block from the second delay 1807 and the phase outputted from the phase extractor 1806 and outputs the phase difference as a timing frequency error.

In the method of calculating a timing error by using a peak of correlation between the reference known data and the received known data in the time domain, the contribution of the correlation values may affect a channel when the channel is a multiple path channel. However, this can be greatly eliminated if the timing error is obtained using the correlation between two sets of received known data. In addition, the timing error can be detected using an entire portion of the known data sequence inserted by the transmitting system, or it can be detected using a portion of the known data sequence which is robust to random or noise data.

Meanwhile, the DC remover 1070 removes pilot tone signal (i.e., DC signal), which has been inserted by the transmitting system, from the matched-filtered signal. Thereafter, the DC remover 1070 outputs the processed signal to the phase compensator 1110.

FIG. 45 illustrates a detailed block diagram of a DC remover according to an embodiment of the present invention. Herein, identical signal processing processes are performed on each of a real number element (or in-phase (I)) and an imaginary number element (or a quadrature (Q)) of the inputted complex signal, thereby estimating and removing the DC value of each element. In order to do so, the DC remover shown in FIG. 45 includes a first DC estimator and remover 1900 and a second DC estimator and remover 1950. Herein, the first DC estimator and remover 1900 includes an R sample buffer 1901, a DC estimator 1902, an M sample holder 1903, a C sample delay 1904, and a subtractor 1905. Herein, the first DC estimator and remover 1900 estimates and removes the DC of the real number element (i.e., an in-phase DC).

Furthermore, the second DC estimator and remover 1950 includes an R sample buffer 1951, a DC estimator 1952, an M sample holder 1953, a C sample delay 1954, and a subtractor 1955. The second DC estimator and remover 1950 estimates and removes the DC of the imaginary number element (i.e., a quadrature DC). In the present invention, the first DC estimator and remover 1900 and the second DC estimator and remover 1950 may receive different input signals. However, each DC estimator and remover 1900 and 1950 has the same structure. Therefore, a detailed description of the first DC estimator and remover 1900 will be presented herein, and the second DC estimator and remover 1950 will be omitted for simplicity.

More specifically, the in-phase signal matched-filtered by the matched filter 1060 is inputted to the R sample buffer 1901 of the first DC estimator and remover 1900 within the DC remover 1070 and is then stored. The R sample buffer 1901 is a buffer having the length of R sample. Herein, the output of the R sample buffer 1901 is inputted to the DC estimator 1902 and the C sample delay 1904. The DC estimator 1902 uses the data having the length of R sample, which are outputted from the buffer 1901, so as to estimate the DC value by using Equation 7 shown below.

$\begin{matrix} {{y\lbrack n\rbrack} = {\frac{1}{R}{\sum\limits_{k = 0}^{R - 1}{x\left\lbrack {k + {M*n}} \right\rbrack}}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 7} \end{matrix}$

In the above-described Equation 7, x[n] represents the inputted sample data stored in the buffer 1901. And, y[n] indicates the DC estimation value. More specifically, the DC estimator 1902 accumulates R number of sample data stored in the buffer 1901 and estimates the DC value by dividing the accumulated value by R. At this point, the stored input sample data set is shifted as much as M sample. Herein, the DC estimation value is outputted once every M samples.

FIG. 46 illustrates a shifting of the input sample data used for DC estimation. For example, when M is equal to 1 (i.e., M=1), the DC estimator 1902 estimates the DC value each time a sample is shifted to the buffer 1901. Accordingly, each estimated result is outputted for each sample. If M is equal to R (i.e., M=R), the DC estimator 1902 estimates the DC value each time R number of samples are shifted to the buffer 1901. Accordingly, each estimated result is outputted for each cycle of R samples. Therefore, in this case, the DC estimator 1902 corresponds to a DC estimator that operates in a block unit of R samples. Herein, any value within the range of 1 and R may correspond to the value M.

As described above, since the output of the DC estimator 1902 is outputted after each cycle of M samples, the M sample holder 1903 holds the DC value estimated from the DC estimator 1902 for a period of M samples. Then, the estimated DC value is outputted to the subtractor 1905. Also, the C sample delay 1904 delays the input sample data stored in the buffer 1901 by C samples, which are then outputted to the subtractor 1905. The subtractor 1905 subtracts the output of the M sample holder 1903 from the output of the C sample delay 1904. Thereafter, the subtractor 1905 outputs the signal having the in-phase DC removed.

Herein, the C sample delay 1904 decides which portion of the input sample data is to be compensated with the output of the DC estimator 1902. More specifically, the DC estimator and remover 1900 may be divided into a DC estimator 1902 for estimating the DC and the subtractor for compensating the input sample data within the estimated DC value. At this point, the C sample delay 1904 decides which portion of the input sample data is to be compensated with the estimated DC value. For example, when C is equal to 0 (i.e., C=0), the beginning of the R samples is compensated with the estimated DC value obtained by using R samples. Alternatively, when C is equal to R (i.e., C=R), the end of the R samples is compensated with the estimated DC value obtained by using R samples. Similarly, the data having the DC removed are inputted to the buffer 1111 and the frequency offset estimator 1112 of the phase compensator 1110.

Meanwhile, FIG. 47 illustrates a detailed block diagram of a DC remover according to another embodiment of the present invention. Herein, identical signal processing processes are performed on each of a real number element (or in-phase (I)) and an imaginary number element (or a quadrature (Q)) of the inputted complex signal, thereby estimating and removing the DC value of each element. In order to do so, the DC remover shown in FIG. 47 includes a first DC estimator and remover 2100 and a second DC estimator and remover 2150. FIG. 47 corresponds to an infinite impulse response (IIR) structure.

Herein, the first DC estimator and remover 2100 includes a multiplier 2101, an adder 2102, a 1 sample delay 2103, a multiplier 2104, a C sample delay 2105, and a subtractor 2106. Also, the second DC estimator and remover 2150 includes a multiplier 2151, an adder 2152, a 1 sample delay 2153, a multiplier 2154, a C sample delay 2155, and a subtractor 2156. In the present invention, the first DC estimator and remover 2100 and the second DC estimator and remover 2150 may receive different input signals. However, each DC estimator and remover 2100 and 2150 has the same structure. Therefore, a detailed description of the first DC estimator and remover 2100 will be presented herein, and the second DC estimator and remover 2150 will be omitted for simplicity.

More specifically, the in-phase signal matched-filtered by the matched filter 1060 is inputted to the multiplier 2101 and the C sample delay 2105 of the first DC estimator and remover 2100 within the DC remover 1070. The multiplier 2101 multiplies a pre-determined constant α to the in-phase signal that is being inputted. Then, the multiplier 2101 outputs the multiplied result to the adder 2102. The adder 2102 adds the output of the multiplier 2101 to the output of the multiplier 2104 that is being fed-back. Thereafter, the adder 2102 outputs the added result to the 1 sample delay 2103 and the subtractor 2106. More specifically, the output of the adder 2102 corresponds to the estimated in-phase DC value.

The 1 sample delay 2103 delays the estimated DC value by 1 sample and outputs the DC value delayed by 1 sample to the multiplier 2104. The multiplier 2104 multiplies a pre-determined constant (1-a) to the DC value delayed by 1 sample. Then, the multiplier 2104 feeds-back the multiplied result to the adder 2102. Subsequently, the C sample delay 2105 delays the in-phase sample data by C samples and, then, outputs the delayed in-phase sample data to the subtractor 2106. The subtractor 2106 subtracts the output of the adder 2102 from the output of the C sample delay 2105, thereby outputting the signal having the in-phase DC removed therefrom.

Similarly, the data having the DC removed are inputted to the buffer 1111 and the frequency offset estimator 1112 of the phase compensator 1110. The frequency offset estimator 1112 uses the known sequence position indicator outputted from the known sequence detector and initial frequency offset estimator 9041 in order to estimate the frequency offset from the known data sequence that is being inputted, the known data sequence having the DC removed by the DC remover 1070. Then, the frequency offset estimator 1112 outputs the estimated frequency offset to the holder 1113. Similarly, the frequency offset estimation value is obtained at each repetition cycle of the known data sequence. Therefore, the holder 1113 holds the frequency offset estimation value during a cycle period of the known data sequence and then outputs the frequency offset estimation value to the NCO 1114. The NCO 1114 generates a complex signal corresponding to the frequency offset held by the holder 1113 and outputs the generated complex signal to the multiplier 1115.

The multiplier 1115 multiplies the complex signal outputted from the NCO 1114 to the data being delayed by a set period of time in the buffer 1111, thereby compensating the phase change included in the delayed data. The data having the phase change compensated by the multiplier 1115 pass through the decimator 1200 so as to be inputted to the equalizer 1003. At this point, since the frequency offset estimated by the frequency offset estimator 1112 of the phase compensator 1110 does not pass through the loop filter, the estimated frequency offset indicates the phase difference between the known data sequences. In other words, the estimated frequency offset indicates a phase offset.

Channel Equalizer within Receiving System

The demodulated data using the known data in the demodulator 1002 is inputted to the channel equalizer 1003. The demodulated data is inputted to the known sequence detector 1004. The equalizer 1003 may perform channel equalization by using a plurality of methods. An example of estimating a channel impulse response (CIR) so as to perform channel equalization will be given in the description of the present invention. Most particularly, an example of estimating the CIR in accordance with each region within the data group, which is hierarchically divided and transmitted from the transmitting system, and applying each CIR differently will also be described herein. Furthermore, by using the known data, the place and contents of which is known in accordance with an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system, and/or the field synchronization data, so as to estimate the CIR, the present invention may be able to perform channel equalization with more stability.

Herein, a data group that is inputted for the equalization process is divided into regions A to D, as shown in FIG. 7A. More specifically, in the example of the present invention, each region A, B, C, and D are further divided into sub-regions A1 to A5, sub-regions B1 and B2, and sub-regions C1 to C3, respectively. Referring to FIG. 7A, the CIR that is estimated from the field synchronization data in the data structure is referred to as CIR_FS. Alternatively, the CIRs that are estimated from each of the 5 known data sequences existing in region A are sequentially referred to as CIR_N0, CIR_N1, CIR_N2, CIR_N3, and CIR_N4.

As described above, the present invention uses the CIR estimated from the field synchronization data and the known data sequences in order to perform channel equalization on data within the data group. At this point, each of the estimated CIRs may be directly used in accordance with the characteristics of each region within the data group. Alternatively, a plurality of the estimated CIRs may also be either interpolated or extrapolated so as to create a new CIR, which is then used for the channel equalization process.

Herein, when a value F(Q) of a function F(x) at a particular point Q and a value F(S) of the function F(x) at another particular point S are known, interpolation refers to estimating a function value of a point within the section between points Q and S. Linear interpolation corresponds to the simplest form among a wide range of interpolation operations. The linear interpolation described herein is merely exemplary among a wide range of possible interpolation methods. And, therefore, the present invention is not limited only to the examples set forth herein.

Alternatively, when a value F(Q) of a function F(x) at a particular point Q and a value F(S) of the function F(x) at another particular point S are known, extrapolation refers to estimating a function value of a point outside of the section between points Q and S. Linear extrapolation is the simplest form among a wide range of extrapolation operations. Similarly, the linear extrapolation described herein is merely exemplary among a wide range of possible extrapolation methods. And, therefore, the present invention is not limited only to the examples set forth herein.

FIG. 48 is a flow chart illustrating a channel equalization method according to one aspect of the present invention. An input data group (current data group) is temporarily stored (Step 2301), and CIRs of the field synchronization data and the known data sequences included in the stored data group are estimated (Step 2302). In step 2301, a portion of the data group can be stored, because sub-regions B1, C1, and A1 are received before the first known data region, and because the channel equalization for sub-regions B1, C1, and A1 are performed using a CIR estimated from the first known data region.

In step 2303, the channel equalization for sub-region C1 of a current data group may be performed using a CIR which is estimated by extrapolating CIR_FS and CIR_N0 estimated from the first known data region. Alternatively, the channel equalization for sub-region C1 of the current data group can be performed using any one of CIR_N4 estimated from a previous data group and CIR_FS estimated from the current data group. If the extrapolated CIR is used, the data included in sub-region C1 must be stored until CIR_N0 is estimated because the sub-region C1 data are inputted before the first known data region in the current data group. The data included in sub-region C1 can be stored in a partial region of an external memory (e.g., RAM) within the broadcast receiving system, or in a separate storage unit (or memory).

In step 2303, the channel equalization for sub-region B1 of a current data group may be performed using a CIR which is estimated by extrapolating CIR_FS and CIR_N0 estimated from the current data group. In a further example, the channel equalization for sub-region B1 can be performed using CIR_FS of the current data group. Similarly, the data included in the sub-region B1 must be stored until CIR_N0 (or CIR_FS) is estimated because the sub-region B1 data are inputted before the first known data region. The data included in sub-region B1 can be stored in a partial region of an external memory (e.g., RAM) within the broadcast receiving system, or in a separate storage unit (or memory).

In step 2304, the channel equalization for sub-region A1 of a current data group may be performed using a CIR which is estimated by interpolating CIR_FS and CIR_N0 estimated from the current data group. Alternatively, the channel equalization for sub-region A1 can be performed using any one of CIR_FS and CIR_N0 estimated from the currently data group. If sub-region A1 is equalized using the interpolated CIR, the data included in sub-region A1 must be stored until CIR_N0 is estimated. The data included in sub-region A1 can be stored in a partial region of an external memory (e.g., RAM) within the broadcast receiving system, or in a separate storage unit (or memory).

For sub-regions A2 to A5 of a current data group, the channel equalization may be performed using a CIR which is estimated by interpolating CIR_N (i−1) and CIR_N(i) of the current data group (Step 2305). Alternatively, the channel equalization may be performed using any one of CIR_N(i−1) and CIR_N(i). In step 2306, the channel equalization for sub-regions B2, C2, and C3 may be performed using a CIR estimated by interpolating CIR_N3 and CIR_N4 estimated from the current data group. Alternatively, the channel equalization may be performed using CIR_N4 estimated from the current data group. Accordingly, an optimum performance may be yielded when performing channel equalization on the data inserted in the data group.

FIG. 49 illustrates a block diagram of a channel equalizer according to another embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 49, the channel equalizer includes a first frequency domain converter 3100, a channel estimator 3110, a second frequency domain converter 3121, a coefficient calculator 3122, a distortion compensator 3130, a time domain converter 3140, a remaining carrier phase error remover 3150, a noise canceller (NC) 3160, and a decision unit 3170. Herein, the first frequency domain converter 3100 includes an overlap unit 3101 overlapping inputted data, and a fast fourier transform (FFT) unit 3102 converting the data outputted from the overlap unit 3101 to frequency domain data. The channel estimator 3110 includes a CIR estimator 3111, a phase compensator 3112, a pre-CIR cleaner 3113, CIR interpolator/extrapolator 3114, a post-CIR cleaner, and a zero-padding unit 3116.

The second frequency domain converter 3121 includes a fast fourier transform (FFT) unit converting the CIR being outputted from the channel estimator 3110 to a frequency domain CIR. The time domain converter 3140 includes an IFFT unit 3141 converting the data having the distortion compensated by the distortion compensator 3130 to time domain data, and a save unit 3142 extracting only valid data from the data outputted from the IFFT unit 3141. The remaining carrier phase error remover 3150 includes an error compensator 3151 removing the remaining carrier phase error included in the channel equalized data, and a remaining carrier phase error estimator 3152 using the channel equalized data and the decision data of the decision unit 3170 so as to estimate the remaining carrier phase error, thereby outputting the estimated error to the error compensator 3151. Herein, any device performing complex number multiplication may be used as the distortion compensator 3130 and the error compensator 3151.

At this point, since the received data correspond to data modulated to VSB type data, 8-level scattered data exist only in the real number element. Therefore, referring to FIG. 49, all of the signals used in the noise canceller 3160 and the decision unit 3170 correspond to real number (or in-phase) signals. However, in order to estimate and compensate the remaining carrier phase error and the phase noise, both real number (in-phase) element and imaginary number (quadrature) element are required. Therefore, the remaining carrier phase error remover 3150 receives and uses the quadrature element as well as the in-phase element.

Generally, prior to performing the channel equalization process, the demodulator 902 within the receiving system performs frequency and phase recovery of the carrier. However, if a remaining carrier phase error that is not sufficiently compensated is inputted to the channel equalizer, the performance of the channel equalizer may be deteriorated. Particularly, in a dynamic channel environment, the remaining carrier phase error may be larger than in a static channel environment due to the frequent and sudden channel changes. Eventually, this acts as an important factor that deteriorates the receiving performance of the present invention.

Furthermore, a local oscillator (not shown) included in the receiving system should preferably include a single frequency element. However, the local oscillator actually includes the desired frequency elements as well as other frequency elements. Such unwanted (or undesired) frequency elements are referred to as phase noise of the local oscillator. Such phase noise also deteriorates the receiving performance of the present invention. It is difficult to compensate such remaining carrier phase error and phase noise from the general channel equalizer. Therefore, the present invention may enhance the channel equaling performance by including a carrier recovery loop (i.e., a remaining carrier phase error remover 3150) in the channel equalizer, as shown in FIG. 49, in order to remove the remaining carrier phase error and the phase noise.

More specifically, the receiving data demodulated in FIG. 49 are overlapped by the overlap unit 3101 of the first frequency domain converter 3100 at a pre-determined overlapping ratio, which are then outputted to the FFT unit 3102. The FFT unit 3102 converts the overlapped time domain data to overlapped frequency domain data through by processing the data with FFT. Then, the converted data are outputted to the distortion compensator 3130. The distortion compensator 3130 performs a complex number multiplication on the overlapped frequency domain data outputted from the FFT unit 3102 included in the first frequency domain converter 3100 and the equalization coefficient calculated from the coefficient calculator 3122, thereby compensating the channel distortion of the overlapped data outputted from the FFT unit 3102. Thereafter, the compensated data are outputted to the IFFT unit 3141 of the time domain converter 3140. The IFFT unit 3141 performs IFFT on the overlapped data having the channel distortion compensated, thereby converting the overlapped data to time domain data, which are then outputted to the error compensator 3151 of the remaining carrier phase error remover 3150.

The error compensator 3151 multiplies a signal compensating the estimated remaining carrier phase error and phase noise with the valid data extracted from the time domain. Thus, the error compensator 3151 removes the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise included in the valid data. The data having the remaining carrier phase error compensated by the error compensator 3151 are outputted to the remaining carrier phase error estimator 3152 in order to estimate the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise and, at the same time, outputted to the noise canceller 3160 in order to remove (or cancel) the noise.

The remaining carrier phase error estimator 3152 uses the output data of the error compensator 3151 and the decision data of the decision unit 3170 to estimate the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise. Thereafter, the remaining carrier phase error estimator 3152 outputs a signal for compensating the estimated remaining carrier phase error and phase noise to the error compensator 3151. In this embodiment of the present invention, an inverse number of the estimated remaining carrier phase error and phase noise is outputted as the signal for compensating the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise.

FIG. 50 illustrates a detailed block diagram of the remaining carrier phase error estimator 3152 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the remaining carrier phase error estimator 3152 includes a phase error detector 3211, a loop filter 3212, a numerically controlled oscillator (NCO) 3213, and a conjugator 3214. Referring to FIG. 50, the decision data, the output of the phase error detector 3211, and the output of the loop filter 3212 are all real number signals. And, the output of the error compensator 3151, the output of the NCO 3213, and the output of the conjugator 3214 are all complex number signals.

The phase error detector 3211 receives the output data of the error compensator 3151 and the decision data of the decision unit 3170 in order to estimate the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise. Then, the phase error detector 3211 outputs the estimated remaining carrier phase error and phase noise to the loop filter. The loop filter 3212 then filters the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise, thereby outputting the filtered result to the NCO 3213. The NCO 3213 generates a cosine corresponding to the filtered remaining carrier phase error and phase noise, which is then outputted to the conjugator 3214.

The conjugator 3214 calculates the conjugate value of the cosine wave generated by the NCO 3213. Thereafter, the calculated conjugate value is outputted to the error compensator 3151. At this point, the output data of the conjugator 3214 becomes the inverse number of the signal compensating the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise. In other words, the output data of the conjugator 3214 becomes the inverse number of the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise.

The error compensator 3151 performs complex number multiplication on the equalized data outputted from the time domain converter 3140 and the signal outputted from the conjugator 3214 and compensating the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise, thereby removing the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise included in the equalized data. Meanwhile, the phase error detector 3211 may estimate the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise by using diverse methods and structures. According to this embodiment of the present invention, the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise are estimated by using a decision-directed method.

If the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise are not included in the channel-equalized data, the decision-directed phase error detector according to the present invention uses the fact that only real number values exist in the correlation values between the channel-equalized data and the decision data. More specifically, if the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise are not included, and when the input data of the phase error detector 3211 are referred to as x_(i)+jx_(q), the correlation value between the input data of the phase error detector 3211 and the decision data may be obtained by using Equation 8 shown below:

E{(x_(i)+jx_(q))({circumflex over (x)}_(i)+j{circumflex over (x)}_(q))*}  Equation 8

At this point, there is no correlation between x_(i) and x_(q). Therefore, the correlation value between x_(i) and x_(q) is equal to 0. Accordingly, if the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise are not included, only the real number values exist herein. However, if the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise are included, the real number element is shown in the imaginary number value, and the imaginary number element is shown in the real number value. Thus, in this case, the imaginary number element is shown in the correlation value. Therefore, it can be assumed that the imaginary number portion of the correlation value is in proportion with the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise. Accordingly, as shown in Equation 9 below, the imaginary number of the correlation value may be used as the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise.

Phase Error=imag{(x _(i) +jx _(q))({circumflex over (x)} _(i) +j{circumflex over (x)} _(q))*}

Phase Error=x _(q) {circumflex over (x)} _(i) −x _(i) {circumflex over (x)} _(q)  Equation 9

FIG. 51 illustrates a block diagram of a phase error detector 3211 obtaining the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise. Herein, the phase error detector 3211 includes a Hilbert converter 3311, a complex number configurator 3312, a conjugator 3313, a multiplier 3314, and a phase error output 3315. More specifically, the Hilbert converter 3311 creates an imaginary number decision data {circumflex over (x)}_(q) by performing a Hilbert conversion on the decision value {circumflex over (x)}_(i) of the decision unit 3170. The generated imaginary number decision value is then outputted to the complex number configurator 3312. The complex number configurator 3312 uses the decision data {circumflex over (x)}_(i) and {circumflex over (x)}_(q) to configure the complex number decision data {circumflex over (x)}_(i)+j{circumflex over (x)}_(q), which are then outputted to the conjugator 3313. The conjugator 3313 conjugates the output of the complex number configurator 3312, thereby outputting the conjugated value to the multiplier 3314. The multiplier 3314 performs a complex number multiplication on the output data of the error compensator 3151 and the output data {circumflex over (x)}_(i)−j{circumflex over (x)}_(q) of the conjugator 3313, thereby obtaining the correlation between the output data {circumflex over (x)}_(i)+j{circumflex over (x)}_(q) of the error compensator 3151 and the decision value {circumflex over (x)}_(i)−j{circumflex over (x)}_(q) of the decision unit 3170. The correlation data obtained from the multiplier 3314 are then inputted to the phase error output 3315. The phase error output 3315 outputs the imaginary number portion x_(q){circumflex over (x)}_(i)−x_(i){circumflex over (x)}_(q) of the correlation data outputted from the multiplier 3314 as the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise.

The phase error detector shown in FIG. 51 is an example of a plurality of phase error detecting methods. Therefore, other types of phase error detectors may be used in the present invention. Therefore, the present invention is not limited only to the examples and embodiments presented in the description of the present invention. Furthermore, according to another embodiment of the present invention, at least 2 phase error detectors are combined so as to detect the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise.

Accordingly, the output of the remaining carrier phase error remover 3150 having the detected remaining carrier phase error and phase noise removed as described above, is configured of an addition of the original (or initial) signal having the channel equalization, the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise, and the signal corresponding to a white noise being amplified to a colored noise during the channel equalization.

Therefore, the noise canceller 3160 receives the output data of the remaining carrier phase error remover 3150 and the decision data of the decision unit 3170, thereby estimating the colored noise. Then, the noise canceller 3160 subtracts the estimated colored noise from the data having the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise removed therefrom, thereby removing the noise amplified during the equalization process.

In order to do so, the noise canceller 3160 includes a subtractor and a noise predictor. More specifically, the subtractor subtracts the noise predicted by the noise predictor from the output data of the residual carrier phase error estimator 3150. Then, the subtractor outputs the signal from which amplified noise is cancelled (or removed) for data recovery and, simultaneously, outputs the same signal to the decision unit 3170. The noise predictor calculates a noise element by subtracting the output of the decision unit 3170 from the signal having residual carrier phase error removed therefrom by the residual carrier phase error estimator 3150. Thereafter, the noise predictor uses the calculated noise element as input data of a filter included in the noise predictor. Also, the noise predictor uses the filter (not shown) in order to predict any color noise element included in the output symbol of the residual carrier phase error estimator 3150. Accordingly, the noise predictor outputs the predicted color noise element to the subtractor.

The data having the noise removed (or cancelled) by the noise canceller 3160 are outputted for the data decoding process and, at the same time, outputted to the decision unit 3170. The decision unit 3170 selects one of a plurality of pre-determined decision data sets (e.g., 8 decision data sets) that is most approximate to the output data of the noise canceller 3160, thereby outputting the selected data to the remaining carrier phase error estimator 3152 and the noise canceller 3160. Meanwhile, the received data are inputted to the overlap unit 3101 of the first frequency domain converter 3100 included in the channel equalizer and, at the same time, inputted to the CIR estimator 3111 of the channel estimator 3110.

The CIR estimator 3111 uses a training sequence, for example, data being inputted during the known data section and the known data in order to estimate the CIR, thereby outputting the estimated CIR to the phase compensator 3112. More specifically, the CIR estimator 3111 uses the data being received during the known data section and the known data of the known data section, which are pre-known by the receiving system based upon an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system, so as to estimate the channel impulse response (CIR_N0 to CIR_N4). In order to do so, the CIR estimator 3111 is provided with a known data position information, wherein a second known data pattern is transmitted from the known data detector 1004. Also, since the second known data pattern of the known data section correspond to data pre-known based upon an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system, the second known data pattern may be pre-stored in the CIR estimator 3111, or a second known data pattern generated from the known data detector 1004 may be received and used.

Additionally, the CIR estimator 3111 uses the data received during the field synchronization section and the field synchronization data of the field synchronization section, which are pre-known by the receiving system based upon an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system, so as to estimate the channel impulse response (CIR_FS). In order to do so, the CIR estimator 3111 is provided with a field synchronization position information from the known data detector 1004. Also, since the field synchronization data of the field synchronization section correspond to data pre-known based upon an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system, the field synchronization data may be pre-stored in the CIR estimator 3111, or field synchronization data generated from the known data detector 1004 may be received and used.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the present invention, the CIR estimator 3111 estimates the CIR by using the least square (LS) method. The LS estimation method calculates a cross correlation value p between the known data that have passed through the channel during the known data section and the known data that are already known by the receiving end. Then, a cross correlation matrix R of the known data is calculated. Subsequently, a matrix operation is performed on R⁻¹·p so that the cross correlation portion within the cross correlation value p between the received data and the initial known data, thereby estimating the CIR of the transmission channel.

The phase compensator 3112 compensates the phase change of the estimated CIR. Then, the phase compensator 3112 outputs the compensated CIR to the first cleaner 3113 or the CIR interpolator-extrapolator 3114. At this point, the phase compensator 3112 may compensate the phase change of the estimated CIR by using a maximum likelihood method. More specifically, the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise that are included in the demodulated received data and, therefore, being inputted change the phase of the CIR estimated by the CIR estimator 3111 at a cycle period of one known data sequence. At this point, if the phase change of the inputted CIR, which is to be used for the linear interpolation process, is not performed in a linear form due to a high rate of the phase change, the channel equalizing performance of the present invention may be deteriorated when the channel is compensated by calculating the equalization coefficient from the CIR, which is estimated by a linear interpolation method.

Therefore, the present invention removes (or cancels) the amount of phase change of the CIR estimated by the CIR estimator 3111 so that the distortion compensator 3130 allows the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise to bypass the distortion compensator 3130 without being compensated. Accordingly, the remaining carrier phase error and phase noise are compensated by the remaining carrier phase error remover 3150. In order to do so, the present invention removes (or cancels) the amount of phase change of the CIR estimated by the phase compensator 3112 by using a maximum likelihood method.

The basic idea of the maximum likelihood method relates to estimating a phase element mutually (or commonly) existing in all CIR elements, then to multiply the estimated CIR with an inverse number of the mutual (or common) phase element, so that the channel equalizer, and most particularly, the distortion compensator 3130 does not compensate the mutual phase element. More specifically, when the mutual phase element is referred to as θ, the phase of the newly estimated CIR is rotated by θ as compared to the previously estimated CIR. When the CIR of a point t is referred to as h_(i)(t), the maximum likelihood phase compensation method obtains a phase θ_(ML) corresponding to when h_(i)(t) is rotated by θ, the squared value of the difference between the CIR of h_(i)(t) and the CIR of h_(i)(t+1), i.e., the CIR of a point (t+1), becomes a minimum value. Herein, when i represents a tap of the estimated CIR, and when N represents a number of taps of the CIR being estimated by the CIR estimator 3111, the value of θ_(ML) is equal to or greater than 0 and equal to or less than N−1. This value may be calculated by using Equation 10 shown below:

$\begin{matrix} {\theta_{ML} = \overset{\min}{\underset{\theta}{\;}}{\sum\limits_{i = 0}^{N - 1}{{{{h_{i}(t)}^{j\theta}} - {h_{i}\left( {t + 1} \right)}}}^{2}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 10} \end{matrix}$

Herein, in light of the maximum likelihood method, the mutual phase element θ_(ML) is equal to the value of θ, when the right side of Equation 10 being differentiated with respect to θ is equal to 0. The above-described condition is shown in Equation 11 below:

$\begin{matrix} \begin{matrix} {{\frac{}{\theta}{\sum\limits_{i = 0}^{N - 1}{\begin{matrix} {{{h_{i}(t)}^{j\theta}} -} \\ {h_{i}\left( {t + 1} \right)} \end{matrix}}^{2}}} = {\frac{}{\theta}{\sum\limits_{i = 0}^{N - 1}{\begin{pmatrix} {{{h_{i}(t)}^{j\theta}} -} \\ {h_{i}\left( {t + 1} \right)} \end{pmatrix}\begin{pmatrix} {{{h_{i}(t)}^{j\theta}} -} \\ {h_{i}\left( {t + 1} \right)} \end{pmatrix}^{*}}}}} \\ {= {\frac{}{\theta}{\sum\limits_{i = 0}^{N - 1}\begin{Bmatrix} \begin{matrix} {{{h_{i}(t)}}^{2} + {{h_{i + 1}(t)}}^{2} -} \\ {{{h_{i}(t)}{h_{i}^{*}\left( {t + 1} \right)}^{j\theta}} -} \end{matrix} \\ {{h_{i}^{*}(t)}{h_{i}\left( {t + 1} \right)}^{- {j\theta}}} \end{Bmatrix}}}} \\ {= {\sum\limits_{i = 0}^{N - 1}\begin{Bmatrix} {{j\; {h_{i}^{*}(t)}{h_{i}\left( {t + 1} \right)}^{- {j\theta}}} -} \\ {j\; {h_{i}^{*}(t)}{h_{i}\left( {t + 1} \right)}^{j\theta}} \end{Bmatrix}}} \\ {= {{j{\sum\limits_{i = 0}^{N - 1}{2\; {Im}\left\{ {{h_{i}^{*}(t)}{h_{i}\left( {t + 1} \right)}^{- {j\theta}}} \right\}}}} = 0}} \end{matrix} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 11} \end{matrix}$

The above Equation 11 may be simplified as shown in Equation 12 below:

$\begin{matrix} {{{{Im}\left\{ {^{- {j\theta}}{\sum\limits_{i = 0}^{N - 1}\left\{ {{h_{i}^{*}(t)}{h_{i}\left( {t + 1} \right)}} \right\}}} \right\}} = 0}{\theta_{ML} = {\arg\left( {\sum\limits_{i = 0}^{N - 1}{{h_{i}^{*}(t)}{h_{i}\left( {t + 1} \right)}}} \right)}}} & {{Equation}\mspace{14mu} 12} \end{matrix}$

More specifically, Equation 12 corresponds to the θ_(ML) value that is to be estimated by the argument of the correlation value between h_(i)(t) and h_(i)(t+1).

FIG. 52 illustrates a phase compensator according to an embodiment of the present invention, wherein the mutual phase element θ_(ML) is calculated as described above, and wherein the estimated phase element is compensated at the estimated CIR. Referring to FIG. 52, the phase compensator includes a correlation calculator 3410, a phase change estimator 3420, a compensation signal generator 3430, and a multiplier 3440. The correlation calculator 3410 includes a first N symbol buffer 3411, an N symbol delay 3412, a second N symbol buffer 3413, a conjugator 3414, and a multiplier 3415.

More specifically, the first N symbol buffer 3411 included in the correlation calculator 3410 is capable of storing the data being inputted from the CIR estimator 3111 in symbol units to a maximum limit of N number of symbols. The symbol data being temporarily stored in the first N symbol buffer 3411 are then inputted to the multiplier 3415 included in the correlation calculator 3410 and to the multiplier 3440. At the same time, the symbol data being outputted from the CIR estimator 3111 are delayed by N symbols from the N symbol delay 3412. Then, the delayed symbol data pass through the second N symbol buffer 3413 and inputted to the conjugator 3414, so as to be conjugated and then inputted to the multiplier 3415.

The multiplier 3415 multiplies the output of the first N symbol buffer 3411 and the output of the conjugator 3414. Then, the multiplier 3415 outputs the multiplied result to an accumulator 3421 included in the phase change estimator 3420. More specifically, the correlation calculator 3410 calculates a correlation between a current CIR h_(i)(t+1) having the length of N and a previous CIR h_(i)(t) also having the length of N. Then, the correlation calculator 3410 outputs the calculated correlation value to the accumulator 3421 of the phase change estimator 3420.

The accumulator 3421 accumulates the correlation values outputted from the multiplier 3415 during an N symbol period. Then, the accumulator 3421 outputs the accumulated value to the phase detector 3422. The phase detector 3422 then calculates a mutual phase element θ_(ML) from the output of the accumulator 3421 as shown in the above-described Equation 11. Thereafter, the calculated θ_(ML) value is outputted to the compensation signal generator 3430. The compensation signal generator 3430 outputs a complex signal e^(−jθ) ^(ML) having a phase opposite to that of the detected phase as the phase compensation signal to the multiplier 3440. The multiplier 3440 multiplies the current CIR h_(i)(t+1) being outputted from the first N symbol buffer 3411 with the phase compensation signal e^(−jθ) ^(ML) , thereby removing the amount of phase change of the estimated CIR.

The CIR having its phase change compensated, as described above, passes through a first cleaner (or pre-CIR cleaner) 3113 or bypasses the first cleaner 3113, thereby being inputted to a CIR calculator (or CIR interpolator-extrapolator) 3114. The CIR interpolator-extrapolator 3114 either interpolates or extrapolates an estimated CIR, which is then outputted to a second cleaner (or post-CIR cleaner) 3115. Herein, the estimated CIR corresponds to a CIR having its phase change compensated. The first cleaner 3113 may or may not operate depending upon whether the CIR interpolator-extrapolator 3114 interpolates or extrapolates the estimated CIR. For example, if the CIR interpolator-extrapolator 3114 interpolates the estimated CIR, the first cleaner 3113 does not operate. Conversely, if the CIR interpolator-extrapolator 3114 extrapolates the estimated CIR, the first cleaner 3113 operates.

More specifically, the CIR estimated from the known data includes a channel element that is to be obtained as well as a jitter element caused by noise. Since such jitter element deteriorates the performance of the equalizer, it preferable that a coefficient calculator 3122 removes the jitter element before using the estimated CIR. Therefore, according to the embodiment of the present invention, each of the first and second cleaners 3113 and 3115 removes a portion of the estimated CIR having a power level lower than the predetermined threshold value (i.e., so that the estimated CIR becomes equal to ‘0’). Herein, this removal process will be referred to as a “CIR cleaning” process.

The CIR interpolator-extrapolator 3114 performs CIR interpolation by multiplying a CIR estimated from the CIR estimator 3112 by a coefficient and by multiplying a CIR having its phase change compensated from the phase compensator (or maximum likelihood phase compensator) 3112 by another coefficient, thereby adding the multiplied values. At this point, some of the noise elements of the CIR may be added to one another, thereby being cancelled. Therefore, when the CIR interpolator-extrapolator 3114 performs CIR interpolation, the original (or initial) CIR having noise elements remaining therein. In other words, when the CIR interpolator-extrapolator 3114 performs CIR interpolation, an estimated CIR having its phase change compensated by the phase compensator 3112 bypasses the first cleaner 3113 and is inputted to the CIR interpolator-extrapolator 3114. Subsequently, the second cleaner 3115 cleans the CIR interpolated by the CIR interpolator-extrapolator 3114.

Conversely, the CIR interpolator-extrapolator 3114 performs CIR extrapolation by using a difference value between two CIRs, each having its phase change compensated by the phase compensator 3112, so as to estimate a CIR positioned outside of the two CIRs. Therefore, in this case, the noise element is rather amplified. Accordingly, when the CIR interpolator-extrapolator 3114 performs CIR extrapolation, the CIR cleaned by the first cleaner 3113 is used. More specifically, when the CIR interpolator-extrapolator 3114 performs CIR extrapolation, the extrapolated CIR passes through the second cleaner 3115, thereby being inputted to the zero-padding unit 3116.

Meanwhile, when a second frequency domain converter (or fast fourier transform (FFT2)) 3121 converts the CIR, which has been cleaned and outputted from the second cleaner 3115, to a frequency domain, the length and of the inputted CIR and the FFT size may not match (or be identical to one another). In other words, the CIR length may be smaller than the FFT size. In this case, the zero-padding unit 3116 adds a number of zeros ‘0’s corresponding to the difference between the FFT size and the CIR length to the inputted CIR, thereby outputting the processed CIR to the second frequency domain converter (FFT2) 3121. Herein, the zero-padded CIR may correspond to one of the interpolated CIR, extrapolated CIR, and the CIR estimated in the known data section.

The second frequency domain converter 3121 performs FFT on the CIR being outputted from the zero padding unit 3116, thereby converting the CIR to a frequency domain CIR. Then, the second frequency domain converter 3121 outputs the converted CIR to the coefficient calculator 3122. The coefficient calculator 3122 uses the frequency domain CIR being outputted from the second frequency domain converter 3121 to calculate the equalization coefficient. Then, the coefficient calculator 3122 outputs the calculated coefficient to the distortion compensator 3130. Herein, for example, the coefficient calculator 3122 calculates a channel equalization coefficient of the frequency domain that can provide minimum mean square error (MMSE) from the CIR of the frequency domain, which is outputted to the distortion compensator 3130. The distortion compensator 3130 performs a complex number multiplication on the overlapped data of the frequency domain being outputted from the FFT unit 3102 of the first frequency domain converter 3100 and the equalization coefficient calculated by the coefficient calculator 3122, thereby compensating the channel distortion of the overlapped data being outputted from the FFT unit 3102.

FIG. 53 illustrates a block diagram of a channel equalizer according to another embodiment of the present invention. In other words, FIG. 53 illustrates a block diagram showing another example of a channel equalizer by using different CIR estimation and application methods in accordance with regions A, B, and C, when the data group is divided into the structure shown in FIG. 7A and FIG. 8. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, known data that are sufficiently are being periodically transmitted in region A. Therefore, an indirect equalizing method using the CIR may be used herein. However, in regions B and C, the known data are neither able to be transmitted at a sufficiently long length nor able to be periodically and equally transmitted. Therefore, it is inadequate to estimate the CIR by using the known data. Accordingly, in regions B and C, a direct equalizing method in which an error is obtained from the output of the equalizer, so as to update the coefficient.

The examples presented in the embodiments of the present invention shown in FIG. 53 include a method of performing indirect channel equalization by using a cyclic prefix on the data of region A, and a method of performing direct channel equalization by using an overlap & save method on the data of regions B and C. Accordingly, referring to FIG. 53, the frequency domain channel equalizer includes a frequency domain converter 3510, a distortion compensator 3520, a time domain converter 3530, a first coefficient calculating unit 3540, a second coefficient calculating unit 3550, and a coefficient selector 3560.

Herein, the frequency domain converter 3510 includes an overlap unit 3511, a select unit 3512, and a first FFT unit 3513. The time domain converter 3530 includes an IFFT unit 3531, a save unit 3532, and a select unit 3533. The first coefficient calculating unit 3540 includes a CIR estimator 3541, an average calculator 3542, second FFT unit 3543, and a coefficient calculator 3544. The second coefficient calculating unit 3550 includes a decision unit 3551, a select unit 3552, a subtractor 3553, a zero-padding unit 3554, a third FFT unit 3555, a coefficient updater 3556, and a delay unit 3557. Also, a multiplexer (MUX), which selects data that are currently being inputted as the input data depending upon whether the data correspond to region A or to regions B and C, may be used as the select unit 3512 of the frequency domain converter 3510, the select unit 3533 of the time domain converter 3530, and the coefficient selector 3560.

In the channel equalizer having the above-described structure, as shown in FIG. 53, if the data being inputted correspond to the data of region A, the select unit 3512 of the frequency domain converter 3510 selects the input data and not the output data of the overlap unit 3511. In the same case, the select unit 3533 of the time domain converter 3530 selects the output data of the IFFT unit 3531 and not the output data of the save unit 3532. The coefficient selector 3560 selects the equalization coefficient being outputted from the first coefficient calculating unit 3540.

Conversely, if the data being inputted correspond to the data of regions B and C, the select unit 3512 of the frequency domain converter 3510 selects the output data of the overlap unit 3511 and not the input data. In the same case, the select unit 3533 of the time domain converter 3530 selects the output data of the save unit 3532 and not the output data of the IFFT unit 3531. The coefficient selector 3560 selects the equalization coefficient being outputted from the second coefficient calculating unit 3550.

More specifically, the received data are inputted to the overlap unit 3511 and select unit 3512 of the frequency domain converter 3510, and to the first coefficient calculating unit 3540. If the inputted data correspond to the data of region A, the select unit 3512 selects the received data, which are then outputted to the first FFT unit 3513. On the other hand, if the inputted data correspond to the data of regions B and C, the select unit 3512 selects the data that are overlapped by the overlap unit 3513 and are, then, outputted to the first FFT unit 3513. The first FFT unit 3513 performs FFT on the time domain data that are outputted from the select unit 3512, thereby converting the time domain data to frequency domain data. Then, the converted data are outputted to the distortion compensator 3520 and the delay unit 3557 of the second coefficient calculating unit 3550.

The distortion compensator 3520 performs complex multiplication on frequency domain data outputted from the first FFT unit 3513 and the equalization coefficient outputted from the coefficient selector 3560, thereby compensating the channel distortion detected in the data that are being outputted from the first FFT unit 3513. Thereafter, the distortion-compensated data are outputted to the IFFT unit 3531 of the time domain converter 3530. The IFFT unit 3531 of the time domain converter 3530 performs IFFT on the channel-distortion-compensated data, thereby converting the compensated data to time domain data. The converted data are then outputted to the save unit 3532 and the select unit 3533. If the inputted data correspond to the data of region A, the select unit 3533 selects the output data of the IFFT unit 3531. On the other hand, if the inputted data correspond to regions B and C, the select unit 3533 selects the valid data extracted from the save unit 3532. Thereafter, the selected data are outputted to be decoded and, simultaneously, outputted to the second coefficient calculating unit 3550.

The CIR estimator 3541 of the first coefficient calculating unit 3540 uses the data being received during the known data section and the known data (reference data generated from the receiving system) of the known data section, the known data being pre-known by the receiving system in accordance with an agreement between the receiving system and the transmitting system, in order to estimate the CIR. Subsequently, the estimated CIR is outputted to the average calculator 3542. The average calculator 3542 calculates an average value of the CIRs that are being inputted consecutively. Then, the calculated average value is outputted to the second FFT unit 3543.

The second FFT unit 3543 performs FFT on the CIR of the time domain that is being inputted, so as to convert the inputted CIR to a frequency domain CIR. Thereafter, the converted frequency domain CIR is outputted to the coefficient calculator 3544. The coefficient calculator 3544 calculates a frequency domain equalization coefficient that satisfies the condition of using the CIR of the frequency domain so as to minimize the mean square error. The calculated equalizer coefficient of the frequency domain is then outputted to the coefficient calculator 3560.

The decision unit 3551 of the second coefficient calculating unit 3550 selects one of a plurality of decision values (e.g., 8 decision values) that is most approximate to the equalized data and outputs the selected decision value to the select unit 3552. Herein, a multiplexer may be used as the select unit 3552. In a general data section, the select unit 3552 selects the decision value of the decision unit 3551. Alternatively, in a known data section, the select unit 3552 selects the known data and outputs the selected known data to the subtractor 3553. The subtractor 3553 subtracts the output of the select unit 3533 included in the time domain converter 3530 from the output of the select unit 3533 so as to calculate (or obtain) an error value. Thereafter, the calculated error value is outputted to the zero-padding unit 3554.

The zero-padding unit 3554 adds (or inserts) the same amount of zeros (0) corresponding to the overlapped amount of the received data in the inputted error. Then, the error extended with zeros (0) is outputted to the third FFT unit 3555. The third FFT unit 3555 converts the error of the time domain having zeros (0) added (or inserted) therein, to the error of the frequency domain. Thereafter, the converted error is outputted to the coefficient update unit 3556. The coefficient update unit 3556 uses the received data of the frequency domain that have been delayed by the delay unit 3557 and the error of the frequency domain so as to update the previous equalization coefficient. Thereafter, the updated equalization coefficient is outputted to the coefficient selector 3560. At this point, the updated equalization coefficient is stored so as that it can be used as a previous equalization coefficient in a later process.

If the input data correspond to the data of region A, the coefficient selector 3560 selects the equalization coefficient calculated from the first coefficient calculating unit 3540. On the other hand, if the input data correspond to the data of regions B and C, the coefficient selector 3560 selects the equalization coefficient updated by the second coefficient calculating unit 3550. Thereafter, the selected equalization coefficient is outputted to the distortion compensator 3520.

FIG. 54 illustrates a block diagram of a channel equalizer according to another embodiment of the present invention. In other words, FIG. 54 illustrates a block diagram showing another example of a channel equalizer by using different CIR estimation and application methods in accordance with regions A, B, and C, when the data group is divided into the structure shown in FIG. 7A. In this example, a method of performing indirect channel equalization by using an overlap & save method on the data of region A, and a method of performing direct channel equalization by using an overlap & save method on the data of regions B and C are illustrated.

Accordingly, referring to FIG. 54, the frequency domain channel equalizer includes a frequency domain converter 3610, a distortion compensator 3620, a time domain converter 3630, a first coefficient calculating unit 3640, a second coefficient calculating unit 3650, and a coefficient selector 3660. Herein, the frequency domain converter 3610 includes an overlap unit 3611 and a first FFT unit 3612. The time domain converter 3630 includes an IFFT unit 3631 and a save unit 3632. The first coefficient calculating unit 3640 includes a CIR estimator 3641, an interpolator 3642, a second FFT unit 3643, and a coefficient calculator 3644. The second coefficient calculating unit 3650 includes a decision unit 3651, a select unit 3652, a subtractor 3653, a zero-padding unit 3654, a third FFT unit 3655, a coefficient updater 3656, and a delay unit 3657.

Also, a multiplexer (MUX), which selects data that are currently being inputted as the input data depending upon whether the data correspond to region A or to regions B and C, may be used as the coefficient selector 3660. More specifically, if the input data correspond to the data of region A, the coefficient selector 3660 selects the equalization coefficient calculated from the first coefficient calculating unit 3640. On the other hand, if the input data correspond to the data of regions B and C, the coefficient selector 3660 selects the equalization coefficient updated by the second coefficient calculating unit 3650.

In the channel equalizer having the above-described structure, as shown in FIG. 54, the received data are inputted to the overlap unit 3611 of the frequency domain converter 3610 and to the first coefficient calculating unit 3640. The overlap unit 3611 overlaps the input data to a pre-determined overlapping ratio and outputs the overlapped data to the first FFT unit 3612. The first FFT unit 3612 performs FFT on the overlapped time domain data, thereby converting the overlapped time domain data to overlapped frequency domain data. Then, the converted data are outputted to the distortion compensator 3620 and the delay unit 3657 of the second coefficient calculating unit 3650.

The distortion compensator 3620 performs complex multiplication on the overlapped frequency domain data outputted from the first FFT unit 3612 and the equalization coefficient outputted from the coefficient selector 3660, thereby compensating the channel distortion detected in the overlapped data that are being outputted from the first FFT unit 3612. Thereafter, the distortion-compensated data are outputted to the IFFT unit 3631 of the time domain converter 3630. The IFFT unit 3631 of the time domain converter 3630 performs IFFT on the distortion-compensated data, thereby converting the compensated data to overlapped time domain data. The converted overlapped data are then outputted to the save unit 3632. The save unit 3632 extracts only the valid data from the overlapped time domain data, which are then outputted for data decoding and, at the same time, outputted to the second coefficient calculating unit 3650 in order to update the coefficient.

The CIR estimator 3641 of the first coefficient calculating unit 3640 uses the data received during the known data section and the known data in order to estimate the CIR. Subsequently, the estimated CIR is outputted to the interpolator 3642. Furthermore, the CIR estimator 3641 uses the data received during the field synchronization section and reference field synchronization data generated from the receiving system, so as to estimate the CIR. Thereafter, the estimated CIR is outputted the interpolator 3642. The interpolator 3642 uses the inputted CIR to estimate the CIRs (i.e., CIRs of the region that does not include the known data) corresponding to the points located between the estimated CIRs according to a predetermined interpolation method. Thereafter, the estimated result is outputted to the second FFT unit 3643.

The second FFT unit 3643 performs FFT on the inputted CIR, so as to convert the inputted CIR to a frequency domain CIR. Thereafter, the converted frequency domain CIR is outputted to the coefficient calculator 3644. The coefficient calculator 3644 calculates a frequency domain equalization coefficient that satisfies the condition of using the CIR of the frequency domain so as to minimize the mean square error. The calculated equalizer coefficient of the frequency domain is then outputted to the coefficient calculator 3660. The structure and operations of the second coefficient calculating unit 3650 is identical to those of the second coefficient calculating unit 3550 shown in FIG. 53. Therefore, the description of the same will be omitted for simplicity.

If the input data correspond to the data of region A, the coefficient selector 3660 selects the equalization coefficient calculated from the first coefficient calculating unit 3640. On the other hand, if the input data correspond to the data of regions B and C, the coefficient selector 3660 selects the equalization coefficient updated by the second coefficient calculating unit 3650. Thereafter, the selected equalization coefficient is outputted to the distortion compensator 3620.

FIG. 55 illustrates a block diagram of a channel equalizer according to another embodiment of the present invention. In other words, FIG. 55 illustrates a block diagram showing another example of a channel equalizer by using different CIR estimation and application methods in accordance with regions A, B, and C, when the data group is divided into the structure shown in FIG. 7A. For example, in region A, the present invention uses the known data in order to estimate the CIR by using a least square (LS) method, thereby performing the channel equalization process. On the other hand, in regions B and C, the present invention estimates the CIR by using a least mean square (LMS) method, thereby performing the channel equalization process. More specifically, since the periodic known data do not exist in regions B and C, as in region A, the same channel equalization process as that of region A cannot be performed in regions B and C. Therefore, the channel equalization process may only be performed by using the LMS method.

Referring to FIG. 55, the channel equalizer includes an overlap unit 3701, a first fast fourier transform (FFT) unit 3702, a distortion compensator 3703, an inverse fast fourier transform (IFFT) unit 3704, a save unit 3705, a first CIR estimator 3706, a CIR interpolator 3707, a decision unit 3708, a second CIR estimator 3710, a selection unit 3711, a second FFT unit 3712, and a coefficient calculator 3713. Herein, any device performed complex number multiplication may be used as the distortion compensator 3703. In the channel equalizer having the above-described structure, as shown in FIG. 55, the overlap unit 3701 overlaps the data being inputted to the channel equalizer to a predetermined overlapping ratio and then outputs the overlapped data to the first FFT unit 3702. The first FFT unit 3702 converts (or transforms) the overlapped data of the time domain to overlapped data of the frequency domain by using fast fourier transform (FFT). Then, the converted data are outputted to the distortion compensator 3703.

The distortion compensator 3703 performs complex multiplication on the equalization coefficient calculated from the coefficient calculator 3713 and the overlapped data of the frequency domain, thereby compensating the channel distortion of the overlapped data being outputted from the first FFT unit 3702. Thereafter, the distortion-compensated data are outputted to the IFFT unit 3704. The IFFT unit 3704 performs inverse fast fourier transform (IFFT) on the distortion-compensated overlapped data, so as to convert the corresponding data back to data (i.e., overlapped data) of the time domain. Subsequently, the converted data are outputted to the save unit 3705. The save unit 3705 extracts only the valid data from the overlapped data of the time domain. Then, the save unit 3705 outputs the extracted valid data for a data decoding process and, at the same time, outputs the extracted valid data to the decision unit 3708 for a channel estimation process.

The decision unit 3708 selects one of a plurality of decision values (e.g., 8 decision values) that is most approximate to the equalized data and outputs the selected decision value to the select unit 3709. Herein, a multiplexer may be used as the select unit 3709. In a general data section, the select unit 3709 selects the decision value of the decision unit 3708. Alternatively, in a known data section, the select unit 3709 selects the known data and outputs the selected known data to the second CIR estimator 3710.

Meanwhile, the first CIR estimator 3706 uses the data that are being inputted in the known data section and the known data so as to estimate the CIR. Thereafter, the first CIR estimator 3706 outputs the estimated CIR to the CIR interpolator 3707. Herein, the known data correspond to reference known data created during the known data section by the receiving system in accordance with an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system. Also, the first CIR estimator 3706 uses the data being inputted during the field synchronization section and the reference field synchronization data, so as to estimate the CIR. Then, the first CIR estimator 3706 outputs the estimated CIR to the CIR interpolator 3707. Herein, the reference field synchronization data correspond to reference field synchronization data generated by the receiving system based upon an agreement between the transmitting system and the receiving system.

At this point, according to an embodiment of the present invention, the first CIR estimator 3706 uses the LS method to estimate the CIR. The LS estimation method calculates a cross correlation value p between the known data that have passed through the channel during the known data section and the known data that are already known by the receiving end. Then, a cross correlation matrix R of the known data is calculated. Subsequently, a matrix operation is performed on R⁻¹·p so that the cross correlation portion within the cross correlation value p between the received data and the initial known data, thereby estimating the CIR of the transmission channel.

The CIR interpolator 3707 receives the CIR from the first CIR estimator 3706. And, in the section between two sets of known data, the CIR is interpolated in accordance with a pre-determined interpolation method. Then, the interpolated CIR is outputted. At this point, the pre-determined interpolation method corresponds to a method of estimating a particular set of data at an unknown point by using a set of data known by a particular function. For example, such method includes a linear interpolation method. The linear interpolation method is one of the most simple interpolation methods. A variety of other interpolation methods may be used instead of the above-described linear interpolation method. It is apparent that the present invention is not limited only to the example set forth in the description of the present invention. More specifically, the CIR interpolator 3707 uses the CIR that is being inputted in order to estimate the CIR of the section that does not include any known data by using the pre-determined interpolation method. Thereafter, the estimated CIR is outputted to the select unit 3711.

The second CIR estimator 3710 uses the input data of the channel equalizer and the output data of the select unit 3709 in order to estimate the CIR. Then, the second CIR estimator 3710 outputs the estimated CIR to the select unit 3711. At this point, according to an embodiment of the present invention, the CIR is estimated by using the LMS method. The LMS estimation method will be described in detail in a later process. In region A, the select unit 3711 selects the CIR outputted from the CIR interpolator 3707. And, in regions B and C, the select unit 3711 selects the CIR outputted from the second CIR estimator 3710. Thereafter, the select unit 3711 outputs the selected CIR to the second FFT unit 3712.

The second FFT unit 3712 converts the CIR that is being inputted to a CIR of the frequency domain, which is then outputted to the coefficient calculator 3713. The coefficient calculator 3713 uses the CIR of the frequency domain that is being inputted, so as to calculate the equalization coefficient and to output the calculated equalization coefficient to the distortion compensator 3703. At this point, the coefficient calculator 3713 calculates a channel equalization coefficient of the frequency domain that can provide minimum mean square error (MMSE) from the CIR of the frequency domain. Herein, the second CIR estimator 3710 may use the CIR estimated in region A as an initial CIR of regions B and C. For example, the value of the last CIR of region A may be used as the value of the initial CIR of region C. Accordingly, the convergence speed of regions B and C may be reduced.

The basic principle of estimating the CIR by using the LMS method in the second CIR estimator 3710 corresponds to receiving the output of an unknown transmission channel and to updating (or renewing) the coefficient of an adaptive filter (not shown) so that the difference value between the output value of the unknown channel and the output value of the adaptive filter is minimized. More specifically, the coefficient value of the adaptive filter is renewed so that the input data of the channel equalizer is equal to the output value of the adaptive filter (not shown) included in the second CIR estimator 3710. Thereafter, the filter coefficient is outputted as the CIR after each FFT cycle.

Referring to FIG. 56, the second CIR estimator 3710 includes a delay unit T, a multiplier, and a coefficient renewal unit for each tab. Herein, the delay unit T sequentially delays the output data {circumflex over (x)}(n) of the select unit 3709. The multiplier multiplies respective output data outputted from each delay unit T with error data e(n). The coefficient renewal unit renews the coefficient by using the output corresponding to each multiplier. Herein, the multipliers that are being provided as many as the number of tabs will be referred to as a first multiplying unit for simplicity. Furthermore, the second CIR estimator 3710 further includes a plurality of multipliers each multiplying the output data of the select unit 3709 and the output data of the delay unit T (wherein the output data of the last delay unit are excluded) with the output data corresponding to each respective coefficient renewal unit. These multipliers are also provided as many as the number of tabs. This group of multipliers will be referred to as a second multiplying unit for simplicity.

The second CIR estimator 3710 further includes an adder and a subtractor. Herein, the adder adds all of the data outputted from each multipliers included in the second multiplying unit. Then, the added value is outputted as the estimation value ŷ(n) of the data inputted to the channel equalizer. The subtractor calculates the difference between the output data ŷ(n) of the adder and the input data y(n) of the channel equalizer. Thereafter, the calculated difference value is outputted as the error data e(n).

Referring to FIG. 56, in a general data section, the decision value of the equalized data is inputted to the first delay unit included in the second CIR estimator 3710 and to the first multiplier included in the second multiplying unit. In the known data section, the known data are inputted to the first delay unit included in the second CIR estimator 3710 and to the first multiplier included in the second multiplying unit. The input data {circumflex over (x)}(n) are sequentially delayed by passing through a number of serially connected delay units T, the number corresponding to the number of tabs. The output data of each delay unit T and the error data e(n) are multiplied by each corresponding multiplier included in the first multiplying unit. Thereafter, the coefficients are renewed by each respective coefficient renewal unit.

Each coefficient that is renewed by the corresponding coefficient renewal unit is multiplied with the input data the output data {circumflex over (x)}(n) and also with the output data of each delay unit T with the exception of the last delay in the corresponding multiplier of the second multiplying unit. Thereafter, the multiplied value is inputted to the adder. The adder then adds all of the output data outputted from each multiplier of the second multiplying unit and outputs the added value to the subtractor as the estimation value ŷ(n) of the input data of the channel equalizer. The subtractor calculates a difference value between the estimation value ŷ(n) and the input data y(n) of the channel equalizer. The difference value is then outputted to each multiplier of the first multiplying unit as the error data e(n). At this point, the error data e(n) is outputted to each multiplier of the first multiplying unit by passing through each respective delay unit T. As described above, the coefficient of the adaptive filter is continuously renewed. And, the output of each coefficient renewal unit is outputted as the CIR of the second CIR estimator 3710 after each FFT cycle.

The above-described methods for calculating the CIR for channel equalization in each region within the data group are merely examples given to facilitate the understanding of the present invention. And, such methods may be more broadly applied. Therefore, the present invention will not be limited only to the examples described herein.

Block Decoder within Receiving System

Meanwhile, if the data being inputted to the block decoder 1005, after being channel-equalized by the equalizer 1003, correspond to the data having both block encoding and trellis encoding performed thereon (i.e., the data within the RS frame, the signaling information data, etc.) by the transmitting system, trellis decoding and block decoding processes are performed on the inputted data as inverse processes of the transmitting system. Alternatively, if the data being inputted to the block decoder 1005 correspond to the data having only trellis encoding performed thereon (i.e., the main service data), and not the block encoding, only the trellis decoding process is performed on the inputted data as the inverse process of the transmitting system.

The trellis decoded and block decoded data by the block decoder 1005 are then outputted to the RS frame decoder 1006. More specifically, the block decoder 1005 removes the known data, data used for trellis initialization, and signaling information data, MPEG header, which have been inserted in the data group, and the RS parity data, which have been added by the RS encoder/non-systematic RS encoder or non-systematic RS encoder of the transmitting system. Then, the block decoder 1005 outputs the processed data to the RS frame decoder 1006. Herein, the removal of the data may be performed before the block decoding process, or may be performed during or after the block decoding process. If the transmitting system includes and transmits signaling information in the data group, the signaling information is outputted to the data deformatter 1006.

Meanwhile, the data trellis-decoded by the block decoder 1005 are outputted to the data deinterleaver 1009. At this point, the data being trellis-decoded by the block decoder 1005 and outputted to the data deinterleaver 1009 may not only include the main service data but may also include the data within the RS frame and the signaling information. Furthermore, the RS parity data that are added by the transmitting system after the pre-processor 230 may also be included in the data being outputted to the data deinterleaver 1009.

According to another embodiment of the present invention, data that are not processed with block decoding and only processed with trellis encoding by the transmitting system may directly bypass the block decoder 1005 so as to be outputted to the data deinterleaver 1009. In this case, a trellis decoder should be provided before the data deinterleaver 1009. More specifically, if the inputted data correspond to the data having only trellis encoding performed thereon and not block encoding, the block decoder 1005 performs Viterbi (or trellis) decoding on the inputted data so as to output a hard decision value or to perform a hard-decision on a soft decision value, thereby outputting the result. Meanwhile, if the inputted data correspond to the data having both block encoding process and trellis encoding process performed thereon, the block decoder 1005 outputs a soft decision value with respect to the inputted data.

In other words, if the inputted data correspond to data being processed with block encoding by the block processor 302 and being processed with trellis encoding by the trellis encoding module 256, in the transmitting system, the block decoder 1005 performs a decoding process and a trellis decoding process on the inputted data as inverse processes of the transmitting system. At this point, the RS frame encoder of the pre-processor included in the transmitting system may be viewed as an outer (or external) encoder. And, the trellis encoder may be viewed as an inner (or internal) encoder. When decoding such concatenated codes, in order to allow the block decoder 1005 to maximize its performance of decoding externally encoded data, the decoder of the internal code should output a soft decision value.

FIG. 57 illustrates a detailed block view of the block decoder 1005 according to an embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 57, the block decoder 1005 includes a feedback controller 4010, an input buffer 4011, a trellis decoding unit (or 12-way trellis coded modulation (TCM) decoder or inner decoder) 4012, a symbol-byte converter 4013, an outer block extractor 4014, a feedback deformatter 4015, a symbol deinterleaver 4016, an outer symbol mapper 4017, a symbol decoder 4018, an inner symbol mapper 4019, a symbol interleaver 4020, a feedback formatter 4021, and an output buffer 4022. Herein, just as in the transmitting system, the trellis decoding unit 4012 may be viewed as an inner (or internal) decoder. And, the symbol decoder 4018 may be viewed as an outer (or external) decoder.

The input buffer 4011 temporarily stores the mobile service data symbols being channel-equalized and outputted from the equalizer 1003. (Herein, the mobile service data symbols may include symbols corresponding to the signaling information, RS parity data symbols and CRC data symbols added during the encoding process of the RS frame.) Thereafter, the input buffer 4011 repeatedly outputs the stored symbols for M number of times to the trellis decoding unit 4012 in a turbo block (TBL) size required for the turbo decoding process. Herein, the size of the input buffer 4011 is larger than or equal to the size of the turbo block (TBL) required for turbo decoding. The turbo block (TBL) size is larger than or equal to the block length (BK) of the symbol interleaver within the block processor. If symbol values that have not been encoded exist among the block encoded symbol values, the input buffer 4011 may equally store and output such non-encoded symbol values for simplicity of the present invention.

At this point, the input data should include a number of symbols being inputted to the symbol interleaver, wherein the number of symbols is equivalent to the block length (K). Therefore, in this case, the length of the TBL is larger than or equal to BK. Also, M represents a number of repetitions of the turbo decoding process, the number being predetermined by the feedback controller 4010. More specifically, the input buffer 4011 stores mobile service data symbols corresponding to the block size TBL for the block decoding process. Herein, the mobile service data symbols corresponding to the block size TBL required for the block decoding process are repeatedly outputted to the trellis decoding unit 4012 as many times as the number of cycle periods during the turbo decoding process.

Furthermore, if a symbol being channel-equalized and outputted from the equalizer 1003 does not correspond to a mobile service data symbol (wherein the mobile service data symbol includes symbols corresponding to the signaling information, RS parity data symbols that are added during the encoding process of the RS frame, and CRC data symbols), the input buffer 4011 does not store nor repeatedly output the corresponding symbol and directly outputs the symbol to the trellis decoding unit 4012 without modification. More specifically, since only trellis decoding is performed on the input symbol value of the section that is not processed with repetitive turbo decoded, the input buffer 4011 directly output its input data to the trellis decoding unit 4012 without storing or repeatedly outputting the corresponding data. Herein, the storage, repetition, and output of the input buffer 4011 are controlled by the feedback controller 4010.

The trellis decoding unit 4012 includes a 12-way trellis encoder, shown in FIG. 22, and a 12-way TCM decoder. Herein, the trellis decoding unit 4012 performs 12-way trellis decoding as inverse processes of the 12-way trellis encoder. More specifically, the trellis decoding unit 4012 receives a number of output symbols of the input buffer 4011 and soft-decision values of the feedback formatter 4021 equivalent to each TBL, so as to perform the TCM decoding process. At this point, based upon the control of the feedback controller 4010, the soft-decision values outputted from the feedback formatter 4021 are matched with a number of mobile service data symbol places so as to be in a one-to-one (1:1) correspondence. Herein, the number of mobile service data symbol places is equivalent to the TBL being outputted from the input buffer 4011.

More specifically, the mobile service data being outputted from the input buffer 4011 are matched with the turbo decoded data being inputted, so that each respective data place can correspond with one another. Thereafter, the matched data are outputted to the trellis decoding unit 4012. For example, if the turbo decoded data correspond to the third symbol within the turbo block, the corresponding symbol (or data) is matched with the third symbol included in the turbo block, which is outputted from the input buffer 4011. Subsequently, the matched symbol (or data) is outputted to the trellis decoding unit 4012.

In order to do so, while the regressive turbo decoding is in process, the feedback controller 4010 controls the input buffer 4011 so that the input buffer 4011 stores the corresponding turbo block data. Also, by delaying data (or symbols), the soft decision value (e.g., LLR) of the symbol outputted from the symbol interleaver 4020 and the symbol of the input buffer 4011 corresponding to the same place (or position) within the block of the output symbol are matched with one another to be in a one-to-one correspondence. Thereafter, the matched symbols are controlled so that they can be inputted to the TCM decoder through the respective path. At this point, if a symbol is not block encoded, turbo decoding cannot be performed, and so a null value is inputted by the feedback formatter 4021 to the matched output position (or place). This process is repeated for a predetermined number of turbo decoding cycle periods. Then, the data of the next turbo block are outputted from the input buffer 4011, thereby repeating the turbo decoding process.

The output of the trellis decoding unit 4012 signifies a degree of reliability of the transmission bits configuring each symbol. For example, in the transmitting system, since the input data of the trellis encoding module correspond to two bits as one symbol, a log likelihood ratio (LLR) between the likelihood of a bit having the value of ‘1’ and the likelihood of the bit having the value of ‘0’ may be respectively outputted (in bit units) to the upper bit and the lower bit. Herein, the log likelihood ratio corresponds to a log value for the ratio between the likelihood of a bit having the value of ‘1’ and the likelihood of the bit having the value of ‘0’. Alternatively, a LLR for the likelihood of 2 bits (i.e., one symbol) being equal to “00”, “01”, “10”, and “11” may be respectively outputted (in symbol units) to all 4 combinations of bits (i.e., 00, 01, 10, 11). Consequently, this becomes the soft decision value that indicates the degree of reliability of the transmission bits configuring each symbol. A maximum a posteriori probability (MAP) or a soft-out Viterbi algorithm (SOVA) may be used as a decoding algorithm of each TCM decoder within the trellis decoding unit 4012.

The output of the trellis decoding unit 4012 is inputted to the symbol-byte converter 4013 and the outer block extractor 4014. The symbol-byte converter 4013 performs a hard-decision process of the soft decision value that is trellis decoded and outputted from the trellis decoding unit 4012. Thereafter, the symbol-byte converter 4013 groups 4 symbols into byte units, which are then outputted to the data deinterleaver 1009. More specifically, the symbol-byte converter 4013 performs hard-decision in bit units on the soft decision value of the symbol outputted from the trellis decoding unit 4012. Therefore, the data processed with hard-decision and outputted in bit units from the symbol-byte converter 4013 not only include main service data, but may also include mobile service data, known data, RS parity data, and MPEG headers.

Among the soft decision values of the trellis decoding unit 4012, the outer block extractor 4014 identifies the soft decision values corresponding to the mobile service data symbols (wherein symbols corresponding to signaling information, RS parity data symbols that are added during the encoding of the RS frame, and CRC data symbols are included) and outputs the identified soft decision values to the feedback deformatter 4015. The feedback deformatter 4015 changes the processing order of the soft decision values corresponding to the mobile service data symbols. This is an inverse process of an initial change in the processing order of the mobile service data symbols, which are generated during an intermediate step, wherein the output symbols outputted from the block processor 303 of the transmitting system are being inputted to the trellis encoding module (e.g., when the symbols pass through the group formatter, the data deinterleaver, the packet formatter, the RS encoder, and the data interleaver). Thereafter, the feedback deformatter 4015 outputs the processed mobile service data symbols to the symbol deinterleaver 4016.

The symbol deinterleaver 4016 performs deinterleaving on the mobile service data symbols having their processing orders changed and outputted from the feedback deformatter 4015, as an inverse process of the symbol interleaving process of the symbol interleaver 403 included in the transmitting system. The size of the block used by the symbol deinterleaver 4016 during the deinterleaving process is identical to interleaving size of an actual symbol (i.e., BK) of the symbol interleaver, shown in FIG. 19, which is included in the transmitting system. This is because the turbo decoding process is performed between the trellis decoding unit 4012 and the symbol decoder 4018. Both the input and output of the symbol deinterleaver 4016 correspond to soft decision values, and the deinterleaved soft decision values are outputted to the outer symbol mapper 4017.

The operations of the outer symbol mapper 4017 may vary depending upon the structure and coding rate of the symbol encoder 402 included in the transmitting system. For example, when data are ½-rate encoded by the symbol encoder 402 and then transmitted, the outer symbol mapper 4017 directly outputs the input data without modification. In another example, when data are ¼-rate encoded by the symbol encoder 402 and then transmitted, the outer symbol mapper 4017 converts the input data so that it can match the input data format of the symbol decoder 4018. Then, the outer symbol mapper 4017 outputs the converted data to the symbol decoder 4018.

The symbol decoder 4018 (i.e., the outer decoder) receives the data outputted from the outer symbol mapper 4017 and performs symbol decoding as an inverse process of the symbol encoder 402 included in the transmitting system. At this point, two different soft decision values are outputted from the symbol decoder 4018. One of the outputted soft decision values corresponds to a soft decision value matching the output symbol of the symbol encoder 402 (hereinafter referred to as a “first soft decision value”). The other one of the outputted soft decision values corresponds to a soft decision value matching the input bit of the symbol encoder 402 (hereinafter referred to as a “second soft decision value”).

More specifically, the first soft decision value represents a degree of reliability the output symbol (i.e., 2 bits) of the symbol encoder 402. Herein, the first soft decision value may output (in bit units) a LLR between the likelihood of 1 bit being equal to ‘1’ and the likelihood of 1 bit being equal to ‘0’ with respect to each of the upper bit and lower bit, which configures a symbol. Alternatively, the first soft decision value may also output (in symbol units) a LLR for the likelihood of 2 bits being equal to “00”, “01”, “10”, and “11” with respect to all possible combinations. The first soft decision value is fed-back to the trellis decoding unit 4012 through the inner symbol mapper 4019, the symbol interleaver 4020, and the feedback formatter 4021. On the other hand, the second soft decision value indicates a degree of reliability the input bit of the symbol encoder 402 included in the transmitting system. Herein, the second soft decision value is represented as the LLR between the likelihood of 1 bit being equal to ‘1’ and the likelihood of 1 bit being equal to ‘0’. Thereafter, the second soft decision value is outputted to the outer buffer 4022. In this case, a maximum a posteriori probability (MAP) or a soft-out Viterbi algorithm (SOVA) may be used as the decoding algorithm of the symbol decoder 4018.

The first soft decision value that is outputted from the symbol decoder 4018 is inputted to the inner symbol mapper 4019. The inner symbol mapper 4019 converts the first soft decision value to a data format corresponding the input data of the trellis decoding unit 4012. Thereafter, the inner symbol mapper 4019 outputs the converted soft decision value to the symbol interleaver 4020. The operations of the inner symbol mapper 4019 may also vary depending upon the structure and coding rate of the symbol encoder 402 included in the transmitting system.

Hereinafter, when the symbol encoder 402 of the transmitting system operates as a ¼ encoder, the operations of the outer symbol mapper 4017 and the inner symbol mapper 4019 will now be described in detail with reference to FIG. 17A to FIG. 17C. According to an embodiment of the present invention, it is assumed that the symbol encoder is configured as shown in FIG. 17A, and that the ¼ outer encoder 411 encodes one bit U so as to output 4 bits u0, u1, u2, and u3, and also that the 4 bits (i.e., 2 symbols) are transmitted twice in symbol units (i.e., each of the 2 symbols is transmitted twice) through the parallel/serial converter 412. In this case, the symbol that is outputted first is referred to as an odd-number-designated symbol, and the symbol that is outputted subsequently is referred to as an even-number-designated symbol for simplicity.

At this point, when the input/output units of the outer symbol mapper 4017 and the inner symbol mapper 4019 corresponds to symbol units, 16 (i.e., 2⁴=16) different soft decision values may be outputted in symbol units from the outer symbol mapper 4017. For example, among the 16 (i.e., 2⁴=16) different soft decision values that are to be outputted from the outer symbol mapper 4017, the soft decision value of s=(1, 0, 0, 1) may be calculated by adding the soft decision value of the inputted odd-number-designated symbol m₀=(1, 0) and the soft decision value of the inputted even-number-designated symbol m₁=(0, 1). Afterwards, the added value is inputted to the symbol decoder 4018.

Furthermore, a total of 4 (i.e., 2²=4) different soft decision values may be outputted in symbol units from the inner symbol mapper 4019. For example, among the 4 (i.e., 2²=4) different soft decision values that are to be outputted from the inner symbol mapper 4019, the soft decision value of the odd-number-designated symbol m₀=(1, 1) may be obtained by calculating the largest value among the soft decision value for each of the output symbols s=(1, 1, X, X) outputted from the symbol decoder 4018. Afterwards, the added value is inputted to the symbol decoder 4018. Also, the soft decision value of the even-number-designated symbol m₁=(0, 0) may be obtained by calculating the largest value among the soft decision value for each of the output symbols s=(X, X, 0, 0) outputted from the symbol decoder 4018. Herein, ‘X’ randomly corresponds to one of ‘1’ and ‘0’. The output of the inner symbol mapper 4019 is then provided to the symbol interleaver 4020.

Meanwhile, if the input/output units of the outer symbol mapper 4017 and the inner symbol mapper 4019 correspond to bit units, a total of 4 different soft decision values may be outputted in bit units from the outer symbol mapper 4017. More specifically, the outer symbol mapper 4017 simultaneously outputs 2 soft decision values of an odd-number-designated input symbol (i.e., a soft decision value for each of the upper bit and lower bit configuring the odd-number-designated input symbol) and 2 soft decision values of an even-number-designated input symbol (i.e., a soft decision value for each of the upper bit and lower bit configuring the even-number-designated input symbol) to the symbol decoder 4018. Also, with respect to the 4 inputs provided by the symbol decoder 4018, the inner symbol mapper 4019 also identifies 2 soft decision values of an odd-number-designated output symbol (i.e., a soft decision value for each of the upper bit and lower bit configuring the odd-number-designated output symbol of the symbol decoder 4018) and 2 soft decision values of an even-number-designated output symbol (i.e., a soft decision value for each of the upper bit and lower bit configuring the even-number-designated output symbol of the symbol decoder 4018), which are then outputted to the symbol interleaver 4020.

In other words, if the symbol encoding process is performed as shown in FIG. 17A, the LLR for each of the 16 symbols is respectively received and symbol-decoded. Thereafter, the processed LLR for each of the 16 symbols may be outputted as the first soft decision value. Alternatively, the LLR for each of the 4 symbols is respectively received and symbol-decoded. Thereafter, the processed LLR for each of the 4 symbols may be outputted as the first soft decision value.

According to another embodiment of the present invention, it is assumed that the symbol encoder is configured as shown in FIG. 17B, and that the ½ outer encoder 421 encodes one bit U so as to output 2 bits u0 and u1, and also that the 2 bits (i.e., 1 symbol) is repeated once through the repeater 422. In this case, the symbol that is outputted first is referred to as an odd-number-designated symbol, and the symbol that is outputted subsequently is referred to as an even-number-designated symbol for simplicity.

At this point, when the input/output units of the outer symbol mapper 4017 and the inner symbol mapper 4019 corresponds to symbol units, 4 (i.e., 2²=4) different soft decision values may be outputted in symbol units from the outer symbol mapper 4017. For example, among the 4 (i.e., 2²=4) different soft decision values that are to be outputted in symbol units from the outer symbol mapper 4017, the soft decision value of s=(1, 0) may be calculated by adding the soft decision value of the inputted odd-number-designated symbol m₀=(1, 0) and the soft decision value of the inputted even-number-designated symbol m₁=(1, 0). Afterwards, the added value is provided to the symbol decoder 4018. Furthermore, a total of 4 (i.e., 2²=4) different soft decision values is to be outputted from the inner symbol mapper 4019. For example, among the 4 (i.e., 2²=4) different soft decision values, the soft decision value of the odd-number-designated symbol m₀=(1, 1) and the even-number-designated symbol m₁=(1, 1) become the soft decision value of the input symbol s=(1, 1) of the symbol decoder 4018. This soft decision value is then outputted to the symbol interleaver 4020.

Meanwhile, if the input/output units of the outer symbol mapper 4017 and the inner symbol mapper 4019 correspond to bit units, a total of 2 soft decision values (i.e., a soft decision for the upper bit and a soft decision value for the lower bit) may be outputted in bit units from the outer symbol mapper 4017. Herein, the soft decision value for the upper bit may be obtained by adding the soft decision for the upper bit of the odd-number-designated symbol and the soft decision for the upper bit of the even-number-designated symbol. Also, the soft decision value for the lower bit may be obtained by adding the soft decision for the lower bit of the odd-number-designated symbol and the soft decision for the lower bit of the even-number-designated symbol.

The inner symbol mapper 4019 receives the soft decision value for the upper bit and the soft decision value for the lower bit from the symbol decoder 4018. Thereafter, the inner symbol mapper 4019 outputs the received soft decision values as 2 soft decision values corresponding to each of the odd-number-designated output bits (i.e., a soft decision value for each of the lower bit and upper bit that are outputted from the symbol decoder 4018). Then, the 2 soft decision values corresponding to each of the odd-number-designated output bits are repeated, thereby being outputted as 2 soft decision values corresponding to each of the even-number-designated output bits.

According to yet another embodiment of the present invention, it is assumed that the symbol encoder is configured as shown in FIG. 17C, and that the input bit is repeated once by the repeater 431, and that the ½ outer encoder 432 ½-rate encodes the bit that is repeated and inputted from the repeater 431, so as to output 2 bits u0 and u1 (i.e., 1 symbol) twice. In this case, the symbol encoder repeats one bit and encodes the repeated bit at a coding rate of ½. Herein, the symbol that is outputted first is referred to as an odd-number-designated symbol, and the symbol that is outputted subsequently is referred to as an even-number-designated symbol for simplicity.

At this point, if the input/output units of the outer symbol mapper 4017 and the inner symbol mapper 4019 correspond to bit units, the outer symbol mapper 4017 directly transmits the output of the symbol deinterleaver 4016 to the symbol decoder 4018 without modification. The inner symbol mapper 4019 directly transmits the output of the symbol decoder 4018 to the symbol interleaver 4020 without modification. Also, even when the input/output units of the outer symbol mapper 4017 and the inner symbol mapper 4019 correspond to symbol units, the outer symbol mapper 4017 directly transmits the output of the symbol deinterleaver 4016 to the symbol decoder 4018 without modification. The inner symbol mapper 4019 directly transmits the output of the symbol decoder 4018 to the symbol interleaver 4020 without modification.

Referring to FIG. 17C, since the input of the ½ outer encoder 432 is repeated by the repeater 431, the soft decisions values for the 2 symbols corresponding to the output data of the block decoder should be determined and outputted as a single soft decision value. More specifically, when the symbol encoding is processed as shown in FIG. 17B and FIG. 17C, the LLR for each of the 4 different symbols may be received and symbol-decoded. Thereafter, the LLR for each of the 4 symbols may be outputted as the first soft decision value. Alternatively, the LLR for 2 bits may be received and symbol-decoded. Thereafter, the LLR for the 2 bits may be outputted as the first soft decision value.

The symbol interleaver 4020 performs symbol interleaving, as shown in FIG. 19, on the first soft decision value that is outputted from the inner symbol mapper 4019. Then, the symbol interleaver 4020 outputs the symbol-interleaved first soft decision value to the feedback formatter 4021. Herein, the output of the symbol interleaver 4020 also corresponds to a soft decision value. With respect to the changed processing order of the soft decision values corresponding to the symbols that are generated during an intermediate step, wherein the output symbols outputted from the block processor 303 of the transmitting system are being inputted to the trellis encoding module 256 (e.g., when the symbols pass through the group formatter, the data deinterleaver, the packet formatter, the RS encoder, and the data interleaver), the feedback formatter 4021 alters (or changes) the order of the output values outputted from the symbol interleaver 4020. Subsequently, the symbol formatter 4020 outputs values to the trellis decoding unit 4012 in the changed order.

The soft decision values outputted from the symbol interleaver 4020 are matched with the positions of mobile service data symbols each having the size of TBL, which are outputted from the input buffer 4011, so as to be in a one-to-one correspondence. Thereafter, the soft decision values matched with the respective symbol position are inputted to the trellis decoding unit 4012. At this point, since the main service data symbols or the RS parity data symbols and known data symbols of the main service data do not correspond to the mobile service data symbols, the feedback formatter 4021 inserts null data in the corresponding positions, thereby outputting the processed data to the trellis decoding unit 4012. Additionally, each time the symbols having the size of TBL are turbo decoded, no value is fed-back by the symbol interleaver 4020 starting from the beginning of the first decoding process. Therefore, the feedback formatter 4021 is controlled by the feedback controller 4010, thereby inserting null data into all symbol positions including a mobile service data symbol. Then, the processed data are outputted to the trellis decoding unit 4012.

The output buffer 4022 receives the second soft decision value from the symbol decoder 4018 based upon the control of the feedback controller 4010. Then, the output buffer 4022 temporarily stores the received second soft decision value. Thereafter, the output buffer 4022 outputs the second soft decision value to the data deformatter 1006. For example, the output buffer 4022 overwrites the second soft decision value of the symbol decoder 4018 until the turbo decoding process is performed for M number of times. Then, once all M number of turbo decoding processes is performed for a single TBL, the corresponding second soft decision value is outputted to the data deformatter 1006.

The feedback controller 4010 controls the number of turbo decoding and turbo decoding repetition processes of the overall block decoder, shown in FIG. 57. More specifically, once the turbo decoding process has been repeated for a predetermined number of times, the second soft decision value of the symbol decoder 4018 is outputted to the data deformatter 1006 through the output buffer 4022. Thus, the block decoding process of a turbo block is completed. In the description of the present invention, this process is referred to as a regressive turbo decoding process for simplicity. At this point, the number of regressive turbo decoding rounds between the trellis decoding unit 4012 and the symbol decoder 4018 may be defined while taking into account hardware complexity and error correction performance. Accordingly, if the number of rounds increases, the error correction performance may be enhanced. However, this may lead to a disadvantage of the hardware becoming more complicated (or complex).

Meanwhile, the data deinterleaver 1009, the RS decoder 4010, and the data derandomizer 4011 correspond to blocks required for receiving the main service data. Therefore, the above-mentioned blocks may not be necessary (or required) in the structure of a digital broadcast receiving system for receiving mobile service data only. The data deinterleaver performs an inverse process of the data interleaver included in the transmitting system. In other words, the data deinterleaver 1009 deinterleaves the main service data outputted from the block decoder 1005 and outputs the deinterleaved main service data to the RS decoder 1010. The data being inputted to the data deinterleaver 1009 include main service data, as well as mobile service data, known data, RS parity data, and an MPEG header.

The RS decoder 1010 performs a systematic RS decoding process on the deinterleaved data and outputs the processed data to the data derandomizer 1011. The data derandomizer receives the output of the RS decoder 1010 and generates a pseudo random data byte identical to that of the randomizer included in the digital broadcast transmitting system. Thereafter, the data derandomizer 1011 performs a bitwise exclusive OR (XOR) operation on the generated pseudo random data byte, thereby inserting the MPEG synchronization bytes to the beginning of each packet so as to output the data in 188-byte main service data packet units.

Meanwhile, the data being outputted from the block decoder to the data deformatter 1006 are inputted in the form of a data group. At this point, the data deformatter 1006 already knows the structure of the data that are to be inputted and is, therefore, capable of identifying the signaling information including system information and the mobile service data from the data group. Thereafter, the data deformatter 1006 outputs the identified signaling information to a block (which will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60) for processing the signaling information and outputs the identified mobile service data to the RS frame decoder 1007.

RS Frame Decoder within Receiving System

More specifically, the RS frame decoder 1007 receives only the RS-encoded and/or CRC-encoded mobile service data that are transmitted from the data deformatter 1006. The RS frame encoder 1007 performs an inverse process of the RS frame encoder included in the transmitting system so as to correct the error within the RS frame. Then, the RS frame decoder 1007 adds the 1-byte MPEG synchronization service data packet, which had been removed during the RS frame encoding process, to the error-corrected mobile service data packet. Thereafter, the processed data packet is outputted to the derandomizer 1008.

FIG. 58 illustrates a process of grouping a plurality of data groups (e.g., 18 data groups) to create a RS frame and a RS frame reliability map, and also a process of performing data deinterleaving in super frame units as an inverse process of the transmitting system and identifying the deinterleaved RS frame and RS frame reliability map. More specifically, the RS frame decoder 1007 groups the inputted mobile service data so as to create a RS frame. The mobile service data have been RS-encoded RS frame units by the transmitting system, and then interleaved in super frame units. At this point, the error correction encoding process (e.g., the CRC encoding process) may have been performed on the mobile service data, or the error correction encoding process may have been omitted.

If it is assumed that the transmitting system has divided the RS frame having the size of (N+2)*(187+P) bytes into M number of data groups (wherein, for example, M is equal to 18) and then transmitted the divided RS frame, the receiving system groups the mobile service data of each data group, as shown in FIG. 58( a), so as to create a RS frame having the size of (N+2)*(187+P) bytes. At this point, if a dummy byte has been added to at least one of the data groups configuring the corresponding RS frame and, then, transmitted, the dummy byte is removed, and a RS frame and a RS frame reliability map are created. For example, as shown in FIG. 14, if K number of dummy bytes has been added, the RS frame and RS frame reliability map are created after the K number of dummy bytes has been removed.

Furthermore, if it is assumed that the RS frame is divided into 18 data groups, which are then transmitted from a single burst-on section, the receiving system also groups mobile service data of 18 data groups within the corresponding burst section, thereby creating the RS frame. Herein, when it is assumed that the block decoder 1005 outputs a soft decision value for the decoding result, the RS frame decoder may decide the ‘0’ and ‘1’ of the corresponding bit by using the codes of the soft decision value. 8 bits that are each decided as described above are grouped to create one data byte. If the above-described process is performed on all soft decision values of the 18 data groups included in a single burst, the RS frame having the size of (N+2)*(187+P) bytes may be configured. Additionally, the present invention uses the soft decision value not only to configure the RS frame but also to configure a reliability map. Herein, the reliability map indicates the reliability of the corresponding data byte, which is configured by grouping 8 bits, wherein the 8 bits are decided by the codes of the soft decision value.

For example, when the absolute value of the soft decision value exceeds a pre-determined threshold value, the value of the corresponding bit, which is decided by the code of the corresponding soft decision value, is determined to be reliable. Conversely, when the absolute value of the soft decision value does not exceed the pre-determined threshold value, the value of the corresponding bit is determined to be unreliable. Thereafter, if even a single bit among the 8 bits, which are decided by the codes of the soft decision value and grouped to configure one data byte, is determined to be unreliable, the corresponding data byte is marked on the reliability map as an unreliable data byte.

Herein, determining the reliability of one data byte is only exemplary. More specifically, when a plurality of data bytes (e.g., at least 4 data bytes) are determined to be unreliable, the corresponding data bytes may also be marked as unreliable data bytes within the reliability map. Conversely, when all of the data bits within the one data byte are determined to be reliable (i.e., when the absolute value of the soft decision values of all 8 bits included in the one data byte exceed the predetermined threshold value), the corresponding data byte is marked to be a reliable data byte on the reliability map. Similarly, when a plurality of data bytes (e.g., at least 4 data bytes) are determined to be reliable, the corresponding data bytes may also be marked as reliable data bytes within the reliability map. The numbers proposed in the above-described example are merely exemplary and, therefore, do not limit the scope or spirit of the present invention.

The process of configuring the RS frame and the process of configuring the reliability map both using the soft decision value may be performed at the same time. Herein, the reliability information within the reliability map is in a one-to-one correspondence with each byte within the RS frame. For example, if a RS frame has the size of (N+2)*(187+P) bytes, the reliability map is also configured to have the size of (N+2)*(187+P) bytes. FIG. 58( a′) and FIG. 58( b′) respectively illustrate the process steps of configuring the reliability map according to the present invention.

At this point, the RS frame of FIG. 58( b) and the RS frame reliability map of FIG. 58( b′) are interleaved in super frame units (as shown in FIG. 6). Therefore, the RS frame and the RS frame reliability maps are grouped to create a super frame and a super frame reliability map. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 58( c) and FIG. 58( c′), a de-permutation (or deinterleaving) process is performed in super frame units on the RS frame and the RS frame reliability maps, as an inverse process of the transmitting system. Then, when the de-permutation process is performed in super frame units, the processed data are divided into de-permuted (or deinterleaved) RS frames having the size of (N+2)*(187+P) bytes and de-permuted RS frame reliability maps having the size of (N+2)*(187+P) bytes, as shown in FIG. 58( d) and FIG. 58( d′). Subsequently, the RS frame reliability map is used on the divided RS frames so as to perform error correction.

FIG. 59 illustrates example of the error correction processed according to embodiments of the present invention. FIG. 59 illustrates an example of performing an error correction process when the transmitting system has performed both RS encoding and CRC encoding processes on the RS frame (as shown in FIG. 5). As shown in FIG. 59( a) and FIG. 59( a′), when the RS frame having the size of (N+2)*(187+P) bytes and the RS frame reliability map having the size of (N+2)*(187+P) bytes are created, a CRC syndrome checking process is performed on the created RS frame, thereby verifying whether any error has occurred in each row. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 59( b), a 2-byte checksum is removed to configure an RS frame having the size of N*(187+P) bytes. Herein, the presence (or existence) of an error is indicated on an error flag corresponding to each row. Similarly, since the portion of the reliability map corresponding to the CRC checksum has hardly any applicability, this portion is removed so that only N*(187+P) number of the reliability information bytes remain, as shown in FIG. 59( b′).

After performing the CRC syndrome checking process, as described above, a RS decoding process is performed in a column direction. Herein, a RS erasure correction process may be performed in accordance with the number of CRC error flags. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 59( c), the CRC error flag corresponding to each row within the RS frame is verified. Thereafter, the RS frame decoder 1005 determines whether the number of rows having a CRC error occurring therein is equal to or smaller than the maximum number of errors on which the RS erasure correction may be performed, when performing the RS decoding process in a column direction. The maximum number of errors corresponds to P number of parity bytes inserted when performing the RS encoding process. In the embodiment of the present invention, it is assumed that 48 parity bytes have been added to each column (i.e., P=48).

If the number of rows having the CRC errors occurring therein is smaller than or equal to the maximum number of errors (i.e., 48 errors according to this embodiment) that can be corrected by the RS erasure decoding process, a (235,187)-RS erasure decoding process is performed in a column direction on the RS frame having (187+P) number of N-byte rows (i.e., 235 N-byte rows), as shown in FIG. 59( d). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59( e), the 48-byte parity data that have been added at the end of each column are removed. Conversely, however, if the number of rows having the CRC errors occurring therein is greater than the maximum number of errors (i.e., 48 errors) that can be corrected by the RS erasure decoding process, the RS erasure decoding process cannot be performed. In this case, the error may be corrected by performing a general RS decoding process. In addition, the reliability map, which has been created based upon the soft decision value along with the RS frame, may be used to further enhance the error correction ability (or performance) of the present invention.

More specifically, the RS frame decoder compares the absolute value of the soft decision value of the block decoder 1005 with the pre-determined threshold value, so as to determine the reliability of the bit value decided by the code of the corresponding soft decision value. Also, 8 bits, each being determined by the code of the soft decision value, are grouped to form one data byte. Accordingly, the reliability information on this one data byte is indicated on the reliability map. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59( c), even though a particular row is determined to have an error occurring therein based upon a CRC syndrome checking process on the particular row, the present invention does not assume that all bytes included in the row have errors occurring therein. The present invention refers to the reliability information of the reliability map and sets only the bytes that have been determined to be unreliable as erroneous bytes. In other words, with disregard to whether or not a CRC error exists within the corresponding row, only the bytes that are determined to be unreliable based upon the reliability map are set as erasure points.

According to another method of the present invention, when it is determined that CRC errors are included in the corresponding row, based upon the result of the CRC syndrome checking result, only the bytes that are determined by the reliability map to be unreliable are set as errors. More specifically, only the bytes corresponding to the row that is determined to have errors included therein and being determined to be unreliable based upon the reliability information, are set as the erasure points. Thereafter, if the number of error points for each column is smaller than or equal to the maximum number of errors (i.e., 48 errors) that can be corrected by the RS erasure decoding process, an RS erasure decoding process is performed on the corresponding column. Conversely, if the number of error points for each column is greater than the maximum number of errors (i.e., 48 errors) that can be corrected by the RS erasure decoding process, a general decoding process is performed on the corresponding column.

More specifically, if the number of rows having CRC errors included therein is greater than the maximum number of errors (i.e., 48 errors) that can be corrected by the RS erasure decoding process, either an RS erasure decoding process or a general RS decoding process is performed on a column that is decided based upon the reliability information of the reliability map, in accordance with the number of erasure points within the corresponding column. For example, it is assumed that the number of rows having CRC errors included therein within the RS frame is greater than 48. And, it is also assumed that the number of erasure points decided based upon the reliability information of the reliability map is indicated as 40 erasure points in the first column and as 50 erasure points in the second column. In this case, a (235,187)-RS erasure decoding process is performed on the first column. Alternatively, a (235,187)-RS decoding process is performed on the second column. When error correction decoding is performed on all column directions within the RS frame by using the above-described process, the 48-byte parity data which were added at the end of each column are removed, as shown in FIG. 59( e).

As described above, even though the total number of CRC errors corresponding to each row within the RS frame is greater than the maximum number of errors that can be corrected by the RS erasure decoding process, while performing error correction decoding on the particular column, when the number of bytes determined to have a low reliability level, based upon the reliability information on the reliability map within a particular column, RS erasure decoding may be performed on the corresponding column. Herein, the difference between the general RS decoding process and the RS erasure decoding process is the number of errors that can be corrected.

More specifically, when performing the general RS decoding process, the number of errors corresponding to half of the number of parity bytes (i.e., (number of parity bytes)/2) that are inserted during the RS encoding process may be error corrected (e.g., 24 errors may be corrected). Alternatively, when performing the RS erasure decoding process, the number of errors corresponding to the number of parity bytes that are inserted during the RS encoding process may be error corrected (e.g., 48 errors may be corrected).

After performing the error correction decoding process, as described above, a RS frame configured of 187 N-byte rows (or packet) may be obtained as shown in FIG. 59( e). The RS frame having the size of N*187 bytes is outputted by the order of N number of 187-byte units. At this point, 1 MPEG synchronization byte, which had been removed by the transmitting system, is added to each 187-byte packet, as shown in FIG. 59( f). Therefore, a 188-byte unit mobile service data packet is outputted. As described above, the RS frame decoded mobile service data are outputted to the data derandomizer 1008. The data derandomizer 1008 performs a derandomizing process, which corresponds to an inverse process of the randomizer included in the transmitting system, on the inputted mobile service data. Then, by outputting the derandomized data, the mobile service data transmitted from the transmitting system may be obtained.

SCCC Mode Detection and Burst On/Off Control

FIG. 60 illustrates an example of a digital broadcast receiving system according to the present invention. The operation of the receiving system will now be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60. The receiving system shown in FIG. 60 includes the blocks shown in FIG. 30. Therefore, detailed description of the functions of the blocks shown in FIG. 30 will be omitted for simplicity. Referring to FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, signaling information may be included in the field synchronization region, the known data region, and the mobile service data region. Herein, the signaling information may transmit various types of transmission parameters.

The demodulator 1002 outputs field synchronization data or known data including transmission parameters to a transmission (Tx) parameter detector/parser 1013. The equalizer 1003 may perform channel equalization on the demodulated signal and output the equalized signal to the Tx parameter detector/parser 1013. The Tx parameter detector/parser 1013 may detect a SCCC mode from the data outputted from the equalizer 1003. Also, when the Tx parameter detector/parser 1013 outputs the SCCC mode information to the block decoder 1005 and the RS frame decoder 1007, the block decoder 1005 may perform block decoding on mobile service data based upon the detected SCCC mode. The data deformatter 1006 identifies the RS encoded signaling information and the RS frame encoded mobile service data from the output of the block decoder 1005. Then, the data deformatter 1006 outputs the identified RS encoded signaling information and the RS frame encoded mobile service data to the Tx parameter detector/parser 1013 and the RS frame decoder 1007, respectively.

The Tx parameter detector/parser 1013 detects transmission parameters from the signal(s) outputted from the demodulator 1002, the equalizer 1003, and the data deformatter 1006. For example, the Tx parameter detector/parser 1013 obtains the location information of the known data from the known sequence detector 1004 and detects a SCCC mode from the output signal of the demodulator 1002 or the equalizer 1003. Then, the detected SCCC mode is outputted to the block decoder 1005 and the RS frame decoder 1007, respectively. An example of the Tx parameter detector/parser 1013 detecting the SCCC mode will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 62.

The block decoder 1005 performs error correction decoding on the received data based upon the SCCC mode provided from the Tx parameter detector/parser 1013. The data deformatter 1006 identifies the data configuring the RS frame and the data including the transmission parameters from the output data of the block decoder 1005. Then, the block decoder 1005 outputs the identified data to the RS frame decoder 1007 and the Tx parameter detector/parser 1013, respectively. The RS frame decoder 1007 performs error correction decoding in RS frame units on the received data and outputs the error correction decoded mobile service data to the de-randomizer 1008. The Tx parameter detector/parser 1013 performs error correction decoding (e.g., RS decoding) on the received data, thereby detecting transmission parameters other than a SCCC mode. The transmission parameters detected from the output data of the block decoder 1005 by the Tx parameter detector/parser 1013 include at least one of a service identifier (ID), an RS mode for regions A and B of a signal frame, an RS mode for region C of the signal frame, a super frame size (SFS), a permuted frame index (PFI) indicating the location information of an RS frame in a super frame, a burst size (BS), a data group index (G1), and a time to a next burst (TNB).

The Tx parameter detector/parser 1013 may output the detected burst information including the burst size (BS), the data group index (GI), and the time to a next burst (TNB) to the known sequence detector 1004. Meanwhile, the known sequence detector 1004 outputs information on a burst section to the burst controller using the burst information. More specifically, the known sequence detector 1004 detects the position of known data within a transmission frame, while the transmission frame is being received. Then, the known sequence position indicator may be outputted to the demodulator 1002 and the equalizer 1003. Also, the known sequence detector 1004 may estimate the initial frequency offset and output the estimated initial frequency offset to a carrier wave recovery unit within the demodulator 1002. The known sequence detector 1004 obtains frame synchronization and outputs a group valid indicator and a burst valid indicator to the burst controller 5000. The burst controller 5000 may control the on/off state of the power supply of the function blocks included in the dotted area. Therefore, the power consumption of the broadcast receiving system can be reduced even when the broadcast receiving system receives broadcast signals in a mobile state.

A burst of data includes a plurality of data groups, and various transmission parameters with respect to the data group of the same burst section, such as an RS mode for regions A and B in a data frame, an RS mode for region C in the data frame, a super frame size (SFS), a permuted frame index (PFI), and a burst size (BS) for the data groups may have the same value. By having the same data values, when a burst includes a plurality of data groups, there are various ways of detecting and using the transmission parameters of the data groups. In a first example, the transmission parameters of all the data groups must be successfully detected or decoded in order to be used. In a second example, when the transmission parameters included in a particular data group are successfully detected or decoded, the detected parameters can be used assuming that the detected parameters of the particular group are identical to those of the remaining data group(s). Transmission parameters may include an error due to channel distortion or noise. Therefore, the transmission parameters which are previously detected can be used if a number of errors included in current transmission parameters is greater than a predetermined value. Alternatively, new transmission parameters which are successfully detected can be used if the number of errors in the current transmission parameters is greater than the predetermined value.

FIG. 61 illustrates a block diagram of the Tx parameter detector/parser 1013 shown in FIG. 60 in detail. Referring to FIG. 61, the Tx parameter detector/parser 1013 includes a mode detector 5011 and a signaling RS decoder 5013. The mode detector 5011 detects a SCCC mode from the signal outputted from the channel equalizer 1003 and outputs the detected SCCC mode to the block decoder 1005 and the RS frame decoder 1007. The example of the mode detector 5011 detecting the SCCC mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 62. Meanwhile, the signaling RS decoder 5013 performs RS decoding on the signaling data provided from the data deformatter 1006 (or from the block decoder 1005) and obtains transmission parameters.

The transmission parameters include at least one of a service identifier (ID), an RS mode for regions A and B of a signal frame, an RS mode for region C of the signal frame, a super frame size (SFS), a permuted frame index (PFI) indicating the location information of an RS frame in a super frame, a burst size (BS), a data group index (GI), and a time to a next burst (TNB). The transmission parameters detected by the signaling RS decoder 1013 are applicable to a data group including the transmission parameters, and the data group index (GI) and the timing to a next burst (TNB) (or burst period (BP)) can be renewed or updated for each data group, thereby being transmitted and received. The RS mode obtained by the signaling RS decoder 5013 is provided to the RS frame decoder which performs error correction decoding on an RS frame including the mobile service data using the RS mode.

FIG. 62 illustrates a block diagram of the Tx parameter detector/parser detecting the SCCC mode. Herein, the Tx parameter detector/parser 1013 may receive known data having the SCCC mode set up by the demodulator and the equalizer. The data point controller determines the location of the known data and allows the pattern correlators 5120 a, 5120 b, . . . , 5120 n to receive data symbols corresponding to a data region including the signaling information. Then, each pattern correlator 5120 calculates and outputs correlation values of the data symbols. The maximum value decision unit 5130 receives the output of each pattern correlator 5210 and decides the signal pattern of the pattern correlator 5120 having the maximum correlation value as the SCCC mode known data predetermined by the transmitting system. The SCCC mode decided by the maximum value decision unit 5130 may be outputted to the block decoder 1005 or RS frame decoder 1007.

FIG. 63 illustrates an example of the known sequence detector 1004 outputting the group valid information (i.e., group valid indicator). Referring to FIG. 63, when a partial correlation value of a broadcast signal is checked according to a cycle period of a counter, a peak value of the partial correlation value corresponding to a data group position (marked as a group) of the broadcast signal, wherein the data group includes known data, may be indicated. The known sequence detector 1004 may output a group valid indicator corresponding to the position where the partial correlation value is generated.

FIG. 64 illustrates an example of the known sequence detector 1004 outputting the burst valid information (i.e., burst valid indicator). Herein, the known sequence detector 1004 may obtain burst information from the signaling information, wherein the burst information may include burst cycle information (i.e., one burst cycle corresponds to 30 fields in the example shown in FIG. 64) and burst length (i.e., one burst corresponds to 18 fields in the example shown in FIG. 64). In a data group corresponding to a data section including mobile service data, partial correlation values may periodically occur as shown in the example of FIG. 63.

The burst controller 5000 receives the group valid indicator and burst valid indicator and may use the received information to control power on/off states of the receiving system, so as to allow the system to process only the signal of the mobile service data section including the user-desired broadcast program. If the broadcast receiving system wishes (or desires) to receive only the mobile service data, the system considers only the mobile service data group included in the corresponding burst as the valid data. Accordingly, the receiving system does not receive data other than the mobile service data group of the corresponding burst. When data corresponding to the mobile service data group are being processed, even though the corresponding data are included in the burst section, the burst controller 5000 may use the group valid indicator, which is generated while the data that are being processed, so as to turn the power on or off.

FIG. 65 illustrates an example of comparing actual on/off time and the burst section. Referring to FIG. 65, (a) represents a data receiving section based upon the burst valid indicator and the group valid indicator. The broadcast receiving system may turn the power on starting from an arbitrary (or random) time prior to a burst starting point or a data group starting point (i.e., set-up time). Alternatively, the broadcast receiving system may turn the power off starting from an arbitrary (or random) time after a burst ending point or a data group ending point (i.e., hold time). Herein, the set-up time or the hold time may be adjusted arbitrarily depending upon specific circumstances.

FIG. 66 illustrates a block diagram showing a structure of a receiving system according to an embodiment of the present invention. Herein, the demodulating unit of FIG. 30 may be applied in the digital broadcast receiving system. Referring to FIG. 66, the digital broadcast receiving system includes a tuner 6001, a demodulating unit 6002, a demultiplexer 6003, an audio decoder 6004, a video decoder 6005, a native TV application manager 6006, a channel manager 6007, a channel map 6008, a first memory 6009, an SI and/or data decoder 6010, a second memory 6011, a system manager 6012, a data broadcast application manager 6013, a storage controller 6014, a third memory 6015, and a GPS module 6020. Herein, the first memory 6009 corresponds to a non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) (or a flash memory). The third memory 6015 corresponds to a large-scale storage device, such as a hard disk drive (HDD), a memory chip, and so on.

The tuner 6001 tunes a frequency of a specific channel through any one of an antenna, cable, and satellite. Then, the tuner 6001 down-converts the tuned frequency to an intermediate frequency (IF), which is then outputted to the demodulating unit 6002. At this point, the tuner 6001 is controlled by the channel manager 6007. Additionally, the result and strength of the broadcast signal of the tuned channel are also reported to the channel manager 6007. The data that are being received by the frequency of the tuned specific channel include main service data, mobile service data, and table data for decoding the main service data and mobile service data.

According to the embodiment of the present invention, audio data and video data for mobile broadcast programs may be applied as the mobile service data. Such audio data and video data are compressed by various types of encoders so as to be transmitted to a broadcasting station. In this case, the video decoder 6004 and the audio decoder 6005 will be provided in the receiving system so as to correspond to each of the encoders used for the compression process. Thereafter, the decoding process will be performed by the video decoder 6004 and the audio decoder 6005. Then, the processed video and audio data will be provided to the users. Examples of the encoding/decoding scheme for the audio data may include AC 3, MPEG 2 AUDIO, MPEG 4 AUDIO, AAC, AAC+, HE AAC, AAC SBR, MPEG-Surround, and BSAC. And, examples of the encoding/decoding scheme for the video data may include MPEG 2 VIDEO, MPEG 4 VIDEO, H.264, SVC, and VC-1.

Depending upon the embodiment of the present invention, examples of the mobile service data may include data provided for data service, such as Java application data, HTML application data, XML data, and so on. The data provided for such data services may correspond either to a Java class file for the Java application, or to a directory file designating positions (or locations) of such files. Furthermore, such data may also correspond to an audio file and/or a video file used in each application. The data services may include weather forecast services, traffic information services, stock information services, services providing information quiz programs providing audience participation services, real time poll, user interactive education programs, gaming services, services providing information on soap opera (or TV series) synopsis, characters, original sound track, filing sites, services providing information on past sports matches, profiles and accomplishments of sports players, product information and product ordering services, services providing information on broadcast programs by media type, airing time, subject, and so on. The types of data services described above are only exemplary and are not limited only to the examples given herein. Furthermore, depending upon the embodiment of the present invention, the mobile service data may correspond to meta data. For example, the meta data be written in XML format so as to be transmitted through a DSM-CC protocol.

The demodulating unit 6002 performs VSB-demodulation and channel equalization on the signal being outputted from the tuner 6001, thereby identifying the main service data and the mobile service data. Thereafter, the identified main service data and mobile service data are outputted in TS packet units. An example of the demodulating unit 6002 is shown in FIG. 30 to FIG. 65. Therefore, the structure and operation of the demodulator will be described in detail in a later process. However, this is merely exemplary and the scope of the present invention is not limited to the example set forth herein. In the embodiment given as an example of the present invention, only the mobile service data packet outputted from the demodulating unit 6002 is inputted to the demultiplexer 6003. In this case, the main service data packet is inputted to another demultiplexer (not shown) that processes main service data packets. Herein, the storage controller 6014 is also connected to the other demultiplexer in order to store the main service data after processing the main service data packets. The demultiplexer of the present invention may also be designed to process both mobile service data packets and main service data packets in a single demultiplexer.

The storage controller 6014 is interfaced with the demultiplexer so as to control instant recording, reserved (or pre-programmed) recording, time shift, and so on of the mobile service data and/or main service data. For example, when one of instant recording, reserved (or pre-programmed) recording, and time shift is set and programmed in the receiving system (or receiver) shown in FIG. 66, the corresponding mobile service data and/or main service data that are inputted to the demultiplexer are stored in the third memory 6015 in accordance with the control of the storage controller 6014. The third memory 6015 may be described as a temporary storage area and/or a permanent storage area. Herein, the temporary storage area is used for the time shifting function, and the permanent storage area is used for a permanent storage of data according to the user's choice (or decision).

When the data stored in the third memory 6015 need to be reproduced (or played), the storage controller 6014 reads the corresponding data stored in the third memory 6015 and outputs the read data to the corresponding demultiplexer (e.g., the mobile service data are outputted to the demultiplexer 6003 shown in FIG. 66). At this point, according to the embodiment of the present invention, since the storage capacity of the third memory 6015 is limited, the compression encoded mobile service data and/or main service data that are being inputted are directly stored in the third memory 6015 without any modification for the efficiency of the storage capacity. In this case, depending upon the reproduction (or reading) command, the data read from the third memory 6015 pass trough the demultiplexer so as to be inputted to the corresponding decoder, thereby being restored to the initial state.

The storage controller 6014 may control the reproduction (or play), fast-forward, rewind, slow motion, instant replay functions of the data that are already stored in the third memory 6015 or presently being buffered. Herein, the instant replay function corresponds to repeatedly viewing scenes that the viewer (or user) wishes to view once again. The instant replay function may be performed on stored data and also on data that are currently being received in real time by associating the instant replay function with the time shift function. If the data being inputted correspond to the analog format, for example, if the transmission mode is NTSC, PAL, and so on, the storage controller 6014 compression encodes the inputted data and stored the compression-encoded data to the third memory 6015. In order to do so, the storage controller 6014 may include an encoder, wherein the encoder may be embodied as one of software, middleware, and hardware. Herein, an MPEG encoder may be used as the encoder according to an embodiment of the present invention. The encoder may also be provided outside of the storage controller 6014.

Meanwhile, in order to prevent illegal duplication (or copies) of the input data being stored in the third memory 6015, the storage controller 6014 scrambles (or encrypts) the input data and stores the scrambled (or encrypted) data in the third memory 6015. Accordingly, the storage controller 6014 may include a scramble algorithm (or encryption algorithm) for scrambling the data stored in the third memory 6015 and a descramble algorithm (or decryption algorithm) for descrambling (or decrypting) the data read from the third memory 6015. The scrambling method may include using an arbitrary key (e.g., control word) to modify a desired set of data, and also a method of mixing signals.

Meanwhile, the demultiplexer 6003 receives the real-time data outputted from the demodulating unit 6002 or the data read from the third memory 6015 and demultiplexes the received data. In the example given in the present invention, the demultiplexer 6003 performs demultiplexing on the mobile service data packet. Therefore, in the present invention, the receiving and processing of the mobile service data will be described in detail. However, depending upon the many embodiments of the present invention, not only the mobile service data but also the main service data may be processed by the demultiplexer 6003, the audio decoder 6004, the video decoder 6005, the native TV application manager 6006, the channel manager 6007, the channel map 6008, the first memory 6009, the SI and/or data decoder 6010, the second memory 6011, a system manager 6012, the data broadcast application manager 6013, the storage controller 6014, the third memory 6015, and the GPS module 6020. Thereafter, the processed data may be used to provide diverse services to the users.

The demultiplexer 6003 demultiplexes mobile service data and system information (SI) tables from the mobile service data packet inputted in accordance with the control of the SI and/or data decoder 6010. Thereafter, the demultiplexed mobile service data and SI tables are outputted to the SI and/or data decoder 6010 in a section format. In this case, it is preferable that data for the data service are used as the mobile service data that are inputted to the SI and/or data decoder 6010. In order to extract the mobile service data from the channel through which mobile service data are transmitted and to decode the extracted mobile service data, system information is required. Such system information may also be referred to as service information. The system information may include channel information, event information, etc. In the embodiment of the present invention, the PSI/PSIP tables are applied as the system information. However, the present invention is not limited to the example set forth herein. More specifically, regardless of the name, any protocol transmitting system information in a table format may be applied in the present invention.

The PSI table is an MPEG-2 system standard defined for identifying the channels and the programs. The PSIP table is an advanced television systems committee (ATSC) standard that can identify the channels and the programs. The PSI table may include a program association table (PAT), a conditional access table (CAT), a program map table (PMT), and a network information table (NIT). Herein, the PAT corresponds to special information that is transmitted by a data packet having a PID of ‘0’. The PAT transmits PID information of the PMT and PID information of the NIT corresponding to each program. The CAT transmits information on a paid broadcast system used by the transmitting system. The PMT transmits PID information of a transport stream (TS) packet, in which program identification numbers and individual bit sequences of video and audio data configuring the corresponding program are transmitted, and the PID information, in which PCR is transmitted. The NIT transmits information of the actual transmission network.

The PSIP table may include a virtual channel table (VCT), a system time table (STT), a rating region table (RRT), an extended text table (ETT), a direct channel change table (DCCT), an event information table (EIT), and a master guide table (MGT). The VCT transmits information on virtual channels, such as channel information for selecting channels and information such as packet identification (PID) numbers for receiving the audio and/or video data. More specifically, when the VCT is parsed, the PID of the audio/video data of the broadcast program may be known. Herein, the corresponding audio/video data are transmitted within the channel along with the channel name and the channel number.

FIG. 67 illustrates a VCT syntax according to an embodiment of the present invention. The VCT syntax of FIG. 67 is configured by including at least one of a table_id field, a section_syntax_indicator field, a private_indicator field, a section_length field, a transport_stream id field, a version_number field, a current_next_indicator field, a section_number field, a last_section_number field, a protocol_version field, and a num_channels_in_section field.

The VCT syntax further includes a first ‘for’ loop repetition statement that is repeated as much as the num_channels_in_section field value. The first repetition statement may include at least one of a short_name field, a major_channel_number field, a minor_channel_number field, a modulation_mode field, a carrier_frequency field, a channel_TSID field, a program_number field, an ETM_location field, an access_controlled field, a hidden field, a service_type field, a source_id field, a descriptor_length field, and a second ‘for’ loop statement that is repeated as much as the number of descriptors included in the first repetition statement. Herein, the second repetition statement will be referred to as a first descriptor loop for simplicity. The descriptor descriptors( ) included in the first descriptor loop is separately applied to each virtual channel.

Furthermore, the VCT syntax may further include an additional_descriptor_length field, and a third ‘for’ loop statement that is repeated as much as the number of descriptors additionally added to the VCT. For simplicity of the description of the present invention, the third repetition statement will be referred to as a second descriptor loop. The descriptor additional_descriptors( ) included in the second descriptor loop is commonly applied to all virtual channels described in the VCT.

As described above, referring to FIG. 67, the table_id field indicates a unique identifier (or identification) (ID) that can identify the information being transmitted to the table as the VCT. More specifically, the table_id field indicates a value informing that the table corresponding to this section is a VCT. For example, a 0xC8 value may be given to the table_id field.

The version_number field indicates the version number of the VCT. The section_number field indicates the number of this section. The last_section_number field indicates the number of the last section of a complete VCT. And, the num_channel_in_section field designates the number of the overall virtual channel existing within the VCT section. Furthermore, in the first ‘for’ loop repetition statement, the short_name field indicates the name of a virtual channel. The major_channel_number field indicates a ‘major’ channel number associated with the virtual channel defined within the first repetition statement, and the minor_channel_number field indicates a ‘minor’ channel number. More specifically, each of the channel numbers should be connected to the major and minor channel numbers, and the major and minor channel numbers are used as user reference numbers for the corresponding virtual channel.

The program_number field is shown for connecting the virtual channel having an MPEG-2 program association table (PAT) and program map table (PMT) defined therein, and the program_number field matches the program number within the PAT/PMT. Herein, the PAT describes the elements of a program corresponding to each program number, and the PAT indicates the PID of a transport packet transmitting the PMT. The PMT described subordinate information, and a PID list of the transport packet through which a program identification number and a separate bit sequence, such as video and/or audio data configuring the program, are being transmitted.

FIG. 68 illustrates a service_type field according to an embodiment of the present invention. The service_type field indicates the service type provided in a corresponding virtual channel. Referring to FIG. 68, it is provided that the service_type field should only indicate an analog television, a digital television, digital audio data, and digital video data. Also, according to the embodiment of the present invention, it may be provided that a mobile broadcast program should be designated to the service_type field. The service_type field, which is parsed by the SI and/or data decoder 6010 may be provided to a receiving system, as shown in FIG. 66, and used accordingly. According to other embodiments of the present invention, the parsed service_type field may also be provided to each of the audio decoder 6004 and video decoder 6005, so as to be used in the decoding process.

The source_id field indicates a program source connected to the corresponding virtual channel. Herein, a source refers to a specific source, such as an image, a text, video data, or sound. The source_id field value has a unique value within the transport stream transmitting the VCT. Meanwhile, a service location descriptor may be included in a descriptor loop (i.e., descriptor{ }) within a next ‘for’ loop repetition statement. The service location descriptor may include a stream type, PID, and language code for each elementary stream.

FIG. 69 illustrates a service location descriptor according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 69, the service location descriptor may include a descriptor_tag field, a descriptor_length field, and a PCR_PID field. Herein, the PCR_PID field indicates the PID of a transport stream packet within a program specified by a program_number field, wherein the transport stream packet includes a valid PCR field. Meanwhile, the service location descriptor includes a number_elements field so as to indicate a number of PIDs used in the corresponding program. The number of repetition of a next ‘for’ descriptor loop repetition statement can be decided, depending upon the value of the number_elements field. Referring to FIG. 69, the ‘for’ loop repetition statement includes a stream_type field, an elementary_PID field, and an ISO_(—)639_language_code field. Herein, the stream_type field indicates the stream type of the corresponding elementary stream (i.e., video/audio data). The elementary_PID field indicates the PID of the corresponding elementary stream. The ISO_(—)639_language_code field indicates a language code of the corresponding elementary stream.

FIG. 70 illustrates examples that may be assigned to the stream_type field according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 70, ISO/IEC 11172 Video, ITU-T Rec. H.262|ISO/IEC 13818-2 Video or ISO/IEC 11172-2 constrained parameter video stream, ISO/IEC 11172 Audio, ISO/IEC 13818-3 Audio, ITU-T Rec. H.222.0|ISO/IEC 13818-1 private_sections, ITU-T Rec. H.222.0|ISO/IEC 13818-1 PES packets containing private data, ISO/IEC 13522 MHEG, ITU-T Rec. H.222.0|ISO/IEC 13818-1 Annex A DSM CC, ITU-T Rec. H.222.1, ISO/IEC 13818-6 type A, ISO/IEC 13818-6 type B, ISO/IEC 13818-6 type C, ISO/IEC 13818-6 type D, ISO/IEC 13818-1 auxiliary, and so on may be applied as the stream type. Meanwhile, according to the embodiment of the present invention, MPH video stream: Non-hierarchical mode, MPH audio stream: Non-hierarchical mode, MPH Non-A/V stream: Non-hierarchical mode, MPH High Priority video stream: Hierarchical mode, MPH High Priority audio stream: Hierarchical mode, MPH Low Priority video stream: Hierarchical mode, MPH Low priority audio stream: Hierarchical mode, and so on may further be applied as the stream type.

As described above, “MPH” corresponds to the initials of “mobile”, “pedestrian”, and “handheld” and represents the opposite concept of a fixed-type system. Therefore, the MPH video stream: Non-hierarchical mode, the MPH audio stream: Non-hierarchical mode, the MPH Non-A/V stream: Non-hierarchical mode, the MPH High Priority video stream: Hierarchical mode, the MPH High Priority audio stream: Hierarchical mode, the MPH Low Priority video stream: Hierarchical mode, and the MPH Low priority audio stream: Hierarchical mode correspond to stream types that are applied when mobile broadcast programs are being transmitted and received. Also the Hierarchical mode and the Non-hierarchical mode each correspond to values that are used in stream types having different priority levels. Herein, the priority level is determined based upon a hierarchical structure applied in any one of the encoding or decoding method.

Therefore, when a hierarchical structure-type codec is used, a field value including the hierarchical mode and the non-hierarchical mode is respectively designated so as to identify each stream. Such stream type information is parsed by the SI and/or data decoder 6010, so as to be provided to the video and audio decoders 6004 and 6005. Thereafter, each of the video and audio decoders 6004 and 6005 uses the parsed stream type information in order to perform the decoding process. Other stream types that may be applied in the present invention may include MPEG 4 AUDIO, AC 3, AAC, AAC+, BSAC, HE AAC, AAC SBR, and MPEG-S for the audio data, and may also include MPEG 2 VIDEO, MPEG 4 VIDEO, H.264, SVC, and VC-1 for the video data.

Furthermore, referring to FIG. 70, in fields using the hierarchical mode and the non-hierarchical mode, such as the MPH video stream: Non-hierarchical mode and the MPH audio stream: Non-hierarchical mode, examples of using the MPEG 4 AUDIO, AC 3, AAC, AAC+, BSAC, HE AAC, AAC SBR, and MPEG-S for the audio data, and the MPEG 2 VIDEO, MPEG 4 VIDEO, H.264, SVC, and VC-1 for the video data may also be respectively used as replacements for each of the audio stream and the video stream may be considered as other embodiments of the present invention and may, therefore, be included in the scope of the present invention. Meanwhile, the stream_type field may be provided as one of the fields within the PMT. And, in this case, it is apparent that such stream_type field includes the above-described syntax. The STT transmits information on the current data and timing information. The RRT transmits information on region and consultation organs for program ratings. The ETT transmits additional description of a specific channel and broadcast program. The EIT transmits information on virtual channel events (e.g., program title, program start time, etc.).

FIG. 71 illustrates a bit stream syntax for an event information table (EIT) according to the present invention. In this embodiment, the EIT shown in FIG. 71 corresponds to a PSIP table including information on a title, start time, duration, and so on of an event in a virtual channel. Referring to FIG. 71, the EIT is configured of a plurality of fields including a table_id field, a section_syntax_indicator field, a private_indicator field, a source_ID, a version_numbers_in_section field, a current_next_indicator field, and a num_event field. More specifically, the table_id field is an 8-bit field having the value of ‘oxCB’, which indicates that the corresponding section is included in the EIT. The section_syntax_indicator field is a 1-bit field having the value of ‘1’. This indicates that the corresponding section passes through the section_length field and is in accordance with a generic section syntax. The private_indicator field corresponds to a 1-bit field having the value of ‘1’.

Also, the source_ID corresponds to an ID identifying a virtual channel that carries an event shown in the above-described table. The version_numbers_in_section field indicates the version of an element included in the event information table. In the present invention, with respect to the previous version number, an event change information included in the event information table, wherein the event change information has a new version number is recognized as the latest change in information. The current_next_indicator field indicates whether the event information included in the corresponding EIT is a current information or a next information. And, finally, the num_event field represents the number of events included in the channel having a source ID. More specifically, an event loop shown below is repeated as many times as the number of events.

The above-described EIT field is commonly applied to at least one or more events included in one EIT syntax. A loop statement, which is included as “for(j=0;j<num_event_in_section;j++){ }”, describes the characteristics of each event. The following fields represent detailed information of each individual event. Therefore, the following fields are individually applied to each corresponding event described by the EIT syntax. An event_ID included in an event loop is an identifier for identifying each individual event. The number of the event ID corresponds to a portion of the identifier for even extended text message (i.e., ETM_ID). A start_time field indicates the starting time of an event. Therefore, the start_time field collects the starting time information of a program provided from an electronic program information. A length_in_seconds field indicates the duration of an event. Therefore, the length_in_seconds field collects the ending time information of a program provided from an electronic program information. More specifically, the ending time information is collected by adding the start_time field value and the length_in_seconds field value. A title_text( ) field may be used to indicate the tile of a broadcast program.

Meanwhile, the descriptor applied to each event may be included in the EIT. Herein, a descriptors_length field indicates the length of a descriptor. Also, a descriptor loop (i.e., descriptor{ }) included in a ‘for’ loop repetition statement includes at least one of an AC-3 audio descriptor, an MPEG 2 audio descriptor, an MPEG 4 audio descriptor, an AAC descriptor, an AAC+ descriptor, an HE AAC descriptor, an AAC SBR descriptor, an MPEG surround descriptor, a BSAC descriptor, an MPEG 2 video descriptor, an MPEG 4 video descriptor, an H.264 descriptor, an SVC descriptor, and a VC-1 descriptor. Herein, each descriptor describes information on audio/video codec applied to each event. Such codec information may be provided to the audio/video decoder 6004 and 6005 and used in the decoding process.

Finally, the DCCT/DCCSCT transmits information associated with automatic (or direct) channel change. And, the MGT transmits the versions and PID information of the above-mentioned tables included in the PSIP. Each of the above-described tables included in the PSI/PSIP is configured of a basic unit referred to as a “section”, and a combination of one or more sections forms a table. For example, the VCT may be divided into 256 sections. Herein, one section may include a plurality of virtual channel information. However, a single set of virtual channel information is not divided into two or more sections. At this point, the receiving system may parse and decode the data for the data service that are transmitting by using only the tables included in the PSI, or only the tables included in the PSIP, or a combination of tables included in both the PSI and the PSIP. In order to parse and decode the mobile service data, at least one of the PAT and PMT included in the PSI, and the VCT included in the PSIP is required. For example, the PAT may include the system information for transmitting the mobile service data, and the PID of the PMT corresponding to the mobile service data (or program number). The PMT may include the PID of the TS packet used for transmitting the mobile service data. The VCT may include information on the virtual channel for transmitting the mobile service data, and the PID of the TS packet for transmitting the mobile service data.

Meanwhile, depending upon the embodiment of the present invention, a DVB-SI may be applied instead of the PSIP. The DVB-SI may include a network information table (NIT), a service description table (SDT), an event information table (EIT), and a time and data table (TDT). The DVB-SI may be used in combination with the above-described PSI. Herein, the NIT divides the services corresponding to particular network providers by specific groups. The NIT includes all tuning information that are used during the IRD set-up. The NIT may be used for informing or notifying any change in the tuning information. The SDT includes the service name and different parameters associated with each service corresponding to a particular MPEG multiplex. The EIT is used for transmitting information associated with all events occurring in the MPEG multiplex. The EIT includes information on the current transmission and also includes information selectively containing different transmission streams that may be received by the IRD. And, the TDT is used for updating the clock included in the IRD.

Furthermore, three selective SI tables (i.e., a bouquet associate table (BAT), a running status table (RST), and a stuffing table (ST)) may also be included. More specifically, the bouquet associate table (BAT) provides a service grouping method enabling the IRD to provide services to the viewers. Each specific service may belong to at least one ‘bouquet’ unit. A running status table (RST) section is used for promptly and instantly updating at least one event execution status. The execution status section is transmitted only once at the changing point of the event status. Other SI tables are generally transmitted several times. The stuffing table (ST) may be used for replacing or discarding a subsidiary table or the entire SI tables.

In the present invention, when the mobile service data correspond to audio data and video data, it is preferable that the mobile service data included (or loaded) in a payload within a TS packet correspond to PES type mobile service data. According to another embodiment of the present invention, when the mobile service data correspond to the data for the data service (or data service data), the mobile service data included in the payload within the TS packet consist of a digital storage media-command and control (DSM-CC) section format. However, the TS packet including the data service data may correspond either to a packetized elementary stream (PES) type or to a section type. More specifically, either the PES type data service data configure the TS packet, or the section type data service data configure the TS packet. The TS packet configured of the section type data will be given as the example of the present invention. At this point, the data service data are includes in the digital storage media-command and control (DSM-CC) section. Herein, the DSM-CC section is then configured of a 188-byte unit TS packet.

Furthermore, the packet identification of the TS packet configuring the DSM-CC section is included in a data service table (DST). When transmitting the DST, ‘0x95’ is assigned as the value of a stream_type field included in the service location descriptor of the PMT or the VCT. More specifically, when the PMT or VCT stream_type field value is ‘0x95’, the receiving system may acknowledge the reception of the data broadcast program including mobile service data. At this point, the mobile service data may be transmitted by a data/object carousel method. The data/object carousel method corresponds to repeatedly transmitting identical data on a regular basis.

At this point, according to the control of the SI and/or data decoder 6010, the demultiplexer 6003 performs section filtering, thereby discarding repetitive sections and outputting only the non-repetitive sections to the SI and/or data decoder 6010. The demultiplexer 6003 may also output only the sections configuring desired tables (e.g., VCT or EIT) to the SI and/or data decoder 6010 by section filtering. Herein, the VCT or EIT may include a specific descriptor for the mobile service data. However, the present invention does not exclude the possibilities of the mobile service data being included in other tables, such as the PMT. The section filtering method may include a method of verifying the PID of a table defined by the MGT, such as the VCT, prior to performing the section filtering process. Alternatively, the section filtering method may also include a method of directly performing the section filtering process without verifying the MGT, when the VCT includes a fixed PID (i.e., a base PID). At this point, the demultiplexer 6003 performs the section filtering process by referring to a table_id field, a version_number field, a section_number field, etc.

As described above, the method of defining the PID of the VCT broadly includes two different methods. Herein, the PID of the VCT is a packet identifier required for identifying the VCT from other tables. The first method consists of setting the PID of the VCT so that it is dependent to the MGT. In this case, the receiving system cannot directly verify the VCT among the many PSI and/or PSIP tables. Instead, the receiving system must check the PID defined in the MGT in order to read the VCT. Herein, the MGT defines the PID, size, version number, and so on, of diverse tables. The second method consists of setting the PID of the VCT so that the PID is given a base PID value (or a fixed PID value), thereby being independent from the MGT. In this case, unlike in the first method, the VCT according to the present invention may be identified without having to verify every single PID included in the MGT. Evidently, an agreement on the base PID must be previously made between the transmitting system and the receiving system.

Meanwhile, in the embodiment of the present invention, the demultiplexer 6003 may output only an application information table (AIT) to the SI and/or data decoder 6010 by section filtering. The AIT includes information on an application being operated in the receiver for the data service. The AIT may also be referred to as an XAIT, and an AMT. Therefore, any table including application information may correspond to the following description. When the AIT is transmitted, a value of ‘0x05’ may be assigned to a stream_type field of the PMT. The AIT may include application information, such as application name, application version, application priority, application ID, application status (i.e., auto-start, user-specific settings, kill, etc.), application type (i.e., Java or HTML), position (or location) of stream including application class and data files, application platform directory, and location of application icon.

In the method for detecting application information for the data service by using the AIT, component_tag, original_network_id, transport_stream_id, and service_id fields may be used for detecting the application information. The component_tag field designates an elementary stream carrying a DSI of a corresponding object carousel. The original_network_id field indicates a DVB-SI original_network_id of the TS providing transport connection. The transport_stream_id field indicates the MPEG TS of the TS providing transport connection, and the service_id field indicates the DVB-SI of the service providing transport connection. Information on a specific channel may be obtained by using the original_network_id field, the transport_stream id field, and the service_id field. The data service data, such as the application data, detected by using the above-described method may be stored in the second memory 6011 by the SI and/or data decoder 6010.

The SI and/or data decoder 6010 parses the DSM-CC section configuring the demultiplexed mobile service data. Then, the mobile service data corresponding to the parsed result are stored as a database in the second memory 6011. The SI and/or data decoder 6010 groups a plurality of sections having the same table identification (table_id) so as to configure a table, which is then parsed. Thereafter, the parsed result is stored as a database in the second memory 6011. At this point, by parsing data and/or sections, the SI and/or data decoder 6010 reads all of the remaining actual section data that are not section-filtered by the demultiplexer 6003. Then, the SI and/or data decoder 6010 stores the read data to the second memory 6011. The second memory 6011 corresponds to a table and data/object carousel database storing system information parsed from tables and mobile service data parsed from the DSM-CC section. Herein, a table_id field, a section_number field, and a last_section_number field included in the table may be used to indicate whether the corresponding table is configured of a single section or a plurality of sections. For example, TS packets having the PID of the VCT are grouped to form a section, and sections having table identifiers allocated to the VCT are grouped to form the VCT. When the VCT is parsed, information on the virtual channel to which mobile service data are transmitted may be obtained.

Also, according to the present invention, the SI and/or data decoder 6010 parses the SLD of the VCT, thereby transmitting the stream type information of the corresponding elementary stream to the audio decoder 6004 or the video decoder 6005. In this case, the corresponding audio decoder 6004 or video decoder 6005 uses the transmitted stream type information so as to perform the audio or video decoding process. Furthermore, according to the present invention, the SI and/or data decoder 6010 parses an AC-3 audio descriptor, an MPEG 2 audio descriptor, an MPEG 4 audio descriptor, an AAC descriptor, an AAC+ descriptor, an HE AAC descriptor, an AAC SBR descriptor, an MPEG surround descriptor, a BSAC descriptor, an MPEG 2 video descriptor, an MPEG 4 video descriptor, an H.264 descriptor, an SVC descriptor, a VC-1 descriptor, and so on, of the EIT, thereby transmitting the audio or video codec information of the corresponding event to the audio decoder 6004 or video decoder 6005. In this case, the corresponding audio decoder 6004 or video decoder 6005 uses the transmitted audio or video codec information in order to perform an audio or video decoding process.

The obtained application identification information, service component identification information, and service information corresponding to the data service may either be stored in the second memory 6011 or be outputted to the data broadcasting application manager 6013. In addition, reference may be made to the application identification information, service component identification information, and service information in order to decode the data service data. Alternatively, such information may also prepare the operation of the application program for the data service. Furthermore, the SI and/or data decoder 6010 controls the demultiplexing of the system information table, which corresponds to the information table associated with the channel and events. Thereafter, an A/V PID list may be transmitted to the channel manager 6007.

The channel manager 6007 may refer to the channel map 6008 in order to transmit a request for receiving system-related information data to the SI and/or data decoder 6010, thereby receiving the corresponding result. In addition, the channel manager 6007 may also control the channel tuning of the tuner 6001. Furthermore, the channel manager 6007 may directly control the demultiplexer 6003, so as to set up the A/V PID, thereby controlling the audio decoder 6004 and the video decoder 6005.

The audio decoder 6004 and the video decoder 6005 may respectively decode and output the audio data and video data demultiplexed from the main service data packet. Alternatively, the audio decoder 6004 and the video decoder 6005 may respectively decode and output the audio data and video data demultiplexed from the mobile service data packet. Meanwhile, when the mobile service data include data service data, and also audio data and video data, it is apparent that the audio data and video data demultiplexed by the demultiplexer 6003 are respectively decoded by the audio decoder 6004 and the video decoder 6005. For example, an audio-coding (AC)-3 decoding algorithm, an MPEG-2 audio decoding algorithm, an MPEG-4 audio decoding algorithm, an AAC decoding algorithm, an AAC+ decoding algorithm, an HE AAC decoding algorithm, an AAC SBR decoding algorithm, an MPEG surround decoding algorithm, and a BSAC decoding algorithm may be applied to the audio decoder 6004. Also, an MPEG-2 video decoding algorithm, an MPEG-4 video decoding algorithm, an H.264 decoding algorithm, an SVC decoding algorithm, and a VC-1 decoding algorithm may be applied to the video decoder 6005. Accordingly, the decoding process may be performed.

Meanwhile, the native TV application manager 6006 operates a native application program stored in the first memory 6009, thereby performing general functions such as channel change. The native application program refers to software stored in the receiving system upon shipping of the product. More specifically, when a user request (or command) is transmitted to the receiving system through a user interface (UI), the native TV application manger 6006 displays the user request on a screen through a graphic user interface (GUI), thereby responding to the user's request. The user interface receives the user request through an input device, such as a remote controller, a key pad, a jog controller, an a touch-screen provided on the screen, and then outputs the received user request to the native TV application manager 6006 and the data broadcasting application manager 6013. Furthermore, the native TV application manager 6006 controls the channel manager 6007, thereby controlling channel-associated operations, such as the management of the channel map 6008, and controlling the SI and/or data decoder 6010. The native TV application manager 6006 also controls the GUI of the overall receiving system, thereby storing the user request and status of the receiving system in the first memory 6009 and restoring the stored information.

The channel manager 6007 controls the tuner 6001 and the SI and/or data decoder 6010, so as to managing the channel map 6008 so that it can respond to the channel request made by the user. More specifically, channel manager 6007 sends a request to the SI and/or data decoder 6010 so that the tables associated with the channels that are to be tuned are parsed. The results of the parsed tables are reported to the channel manager 6007 by the SI and/or data decoder 6010. Thereafter, based on the parsed results, the channel manager 6007 updates the channel map 6008 and sets up a PID in the demultiplexer for demultiplexing the tables associated with the data service data from the mobile service data.

The system manager 6012 controls the booting of the receiving system by turning the power on or off. Then, the system manager 6012 stores ROM images (including downloaded software images) in the first memory 6009. More specifically, the first memory 6009 stores management programs such as operating system (OS) programs required for managing the receiving system and also application program executing data service functions. The application program is a program processing the data service data stored in the second memory so as to provide the user with the data service. If the data service data are stored in the second memory 6011, the corresponding data service data are processed by the above-described application program or by other application programs, thereby being provided to the user. The management program and application program stored in the first memory may be updated or corrected to a newly downloaded program. Furthermore, the storage of the stored management program and application program is maintained without being deleted even if the power of the system is shut down. Therefore, when the power is supplied, the programs may be executed without having to be newly downloaded once again.

The application program for providing data service according to the present invention may either be initially stored in the first memory 6009 upon the shipping of the receiving system, or be stored in the first memory 6009 after being downloaded. The application program for the data service (i.e., the data service providing application program) stored in the first memory 6009 may also be deleted, updated, and corrected. Furthermore, the data service providing application program may be downloaded and executed along with the data service data each time the data service data are being received.

When a data service request is transmitted through the user interface, the data broadcasting application manager 6013 operates the corresponding application program stored in the first memory 6009 so as to process the requested data, thereby providing the user with the requested data service. And, in order to provide such data service, the data broadcasting application manager 6013 supports the graphic user interface (GUI). Herein, the data service may be provided in the form of text (or short message service (SMS)), voice message, still image, and moving image. The data broadcasting application manager 6013 may be provided with a platform for executing the application program stored in the first memory 6009. The platform may be, for example, a Java virtual machine for executing the Java program. Hereinafter, an example of the data broadcasting application manager 6013 executing the data service providing application program stored in the first memory 6009, so as to process the data service data stored in the second memory 6011, thereby providing the user with the corresponding data service will now be described in detail.

Assuming that the data service corresponds to a traffic information service, the data service according to the present invention is provided to the user of a receiver that is not equipped with an electronic map and/or a GPS system in the form of at least one of a text (or short message service (SMS)), a voice message, a graphic message, a still image, and a moving image. In this case, when a GPS module 6020 is mounted on the receiving system, as shown in FIG. 66, the GPS module 6020 receives satellite signals transmitted from a plurality of low earth orbit satellites and extracts the current position (or location) information (e.g., longitude, latitude, altitude), thereby outputting the extracted information to the data broadcasting application manager 6013.

At this point, it is assumed that the electronic map including information on each link and nod and other diverse graphic information are stored in one of the second memory 6011, the first memory 6009, and another memory that is not shown. More specifically, according to the request made by the data broadcasting application manager 6013, the data service data stored in the second memory 6011 are read and inputted to the data broadcasting application manager 6013. The data broadcasting application manager 6013 translates (or deciphers) the data service data read from the second memory 6011, thereby extracting the necessary information according to the contents of the message and/or a control signal. In other words, the data broadcasting application manager 6013 uses the current position information and the graphic information, so that the current position information can be processed and provided to the user in a graphic format.

FIG. 72 illustrates a block diagram showing the structure of a digital broadcast (or television) receiving system according to another embodiment of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 72, the digital broadcast receiving system includes a tuner 7001, a demodulating unit 7002, a demultiplexer 7003, a first descrambler 7004, an audio decoder 7005, a video decoder 7006, a second descrambler 7007, an authentication unit 7008, a native TV application manager 7009, a channel manager 7010, a channel map 7011, a first memory 7012, a data decoder 7013, a second memory 7014, a system manager 7015, a data broadcasting application manager 7016, a storage controller 7017, a third memory 7018, a telecommunication module 7019, and a GPS module 7020. Herein, the third memory 7018 is a mass storage device, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a memory chip. Also, during the description of the digital broadcast (or television or DTV) receiving system shown in FIG. 72, the components that are identical to those of the digital broadcast receiving system of FIG. 66 will be omitted for simplicity.

As described above, in order to provide services for preventing illegal duplication (or copies) or illegal viewing of the enhanced data and/or main data that are transmitted by using a broadcast network, and to provide paid broadcast services, the transmitting system may generally scramble and transmit the broadcast contents. Therefore, the receiving system needs to descramble the scrambled broadcast contents in order to provide the user with the proper broadcast contents. Furthermore, the receiving system may generally be processed with an authentication process with an authentication means before the descrambling process. Hereinafter, the receiving system including an authentication means and a descrambling means according to an embodiment of the present invention will now be described in detail.

According to the present invention, the receiving system may be provided with a descrambling means receiving scrambled broadcasting contents and an authentication means authenticating (or verifying) whether the receiving system is entitled to receive the descrambled contents. Hereinafter, the descrambling means will be referred to as first and second descramblers 7004 and 7007, and the authentication means will be referred to as an authentication unit 7008. Such naming of the corresponding components is merely exemplary and is not limited to the terms suggested in the description of the present invention. For example, the units may also be referred to as a decryptor. Although FIG. 72 illustrates an example of the descramblers 7004 and 7007 and the authentication unit 7008 being provided inside the receiving system, each of the descramblers 7004 and 7007 and the authentication unit 7008 may also be separately provided in an internal or external module. Herein, the module may include a slot type, such as a SD or CF memory, a memory stick type, a USB type, and so on, and may be detachably fixed to the receiving system.

As described above, when the authentication process is performed successfully by the authentication unit 7008, the scrambled broadcasting contents are descrambled by the descramblers 7004 and 7007, thereby being provided to the user. At this point, a variety of the authentication method and descrambling method may be used herein. However, an agreement on each corresponding method should be made between the receiving system and the transmitting system. Hereinafter, the authentication and descrambling methods will now be described, and the description of identical components or process steps will be omitted for simplicity.

The receiving system including the authentication unit 7008 and the descramblers 7004 and 7007 will now be described in detail. The receiving system receives the scrambled broadcasting contents through the tuner 7001 and the demodulating unit 7002. Then, the system manager 7015 decides whether the received broadcasting contents have been scrambled. Herein, the demodulating unit 7002 may be included as a demodulating means according to embodiment of the present invention as described in FIG. 30 to FIG. 65. However, the present invention is not limited to the examples given in the description set forth herein. If the system manager 7015 decides that the received broadcasting contents have been scrambled, then the system manager 7015 controls the system to operate the authentication unit 7008. As described above, the authentication unit 7008 performs an authentication process in order to decide whether the receiving system according to the present invention corresponds to a legitimate host entitled to receive the paid broadcasting service. Herein, the authentication process may vary in accordance with the authentication methods.

For example, the authentication unit 7008 may perform the authentication process by comparing an IP address of an IP datagram within the received broadcasting contents with a specific address of a corresponding host. At this point, the specific address of the corresponding receiving system (or host) may be a MAC address. More specifically, the authentication unit 7008 may extract the IP address from the decapsulated IP datagram, thereby obtaining the receiving system information that is mapped with the IP address. At this point, the receiving system should be provided, in advance, with information (e.g., a table format) that can map the IP address and the receiving system information. Accordingly, the authentication unit 7008 performs the authentication process by determining the conformity between the address of the corresponding receiving system and the system information of the receiving system that is mapped with the IP address. In other words, if the authentication unit 7008 determines that the two types of information conform to one another, then the authentication unit 7008 determines that the receiving system is entitled to receive the corresponding broadcasting contents.

In another example, standardized identification information is defined in advance by the receiving system and the transmitting system. Then, the identification information of the receiving system requesting the paid broadcasting service is transmitted by the transmitting system. Thereafter, the receiving system determines whether the received identification information conforms with its own unique identification number, so as to perform the authentication process. More specifically, the transmitting system creates a database for storing the identification information (or number) of the receiving system requesting the paid broadcasting service. Then, if the corresponding broadcasting contents are scrambled, the transmitting system includes the identification information in the EMM, which is then transmitted to the receiving system.

If the corresponding broadcasting contents are scrambled, messages (e.g., entitlement control message (ECM), entitlement management message (EMM)), such as the CAS information, mode information, message position information, that are applied to the scrambling of the broadcasting contents are transmitted through a corresponding data header or another data packet. The ECM may include a control word (CW) used for scrambling the broadcasting contents. At this point, the control word may be encoded with an authentication key. The EMM may include an authentication key and entitlement information of the corresponding data. Herein, the authentication key may be encoded with a receiving system-specific distribution key. In other words, assuming that the enhanced data are scrambled by using the control word, and that the authentication information and the descrambling information are transmitted from the transmitting system, the transmitting system encodes the CW with the authentication key and, then, includes the encoded CW in the entitlement control message (ECM), which is then transmitted to the receiving system. Furthermore, the transmitting system includes the authentication key used for encoding the CW and the entitlement to receive data (or services) of the receiving system (i.e., a standardized serial number of the receiving system that is entitled to receive the corresponding broadcasting service or data) in the entitlement management message (EMM), which is then transmitted to the receiving system.

Accordingly, the authentication unit 7008 of the receiving system extracts the identification information of the receiving system and the identification information included in the EMM of the broadcasting service that is being received. Then, the authentication unit 7008 determines whether the identification information conform to each other, so as to perform the authentication process. More specifically, if the authentication unit 7008 determines that the information conform to each other, then the authentication unit 7008 eventually determines that the receiving system is entitled to receive the request broadcasting service.

In yet another example, the authentication unit 7008 of the receiving system may be detachably fixed to an external module. In this case, the receiving system is interfaced with the external module through a common interface (CI). In other words, the external module may receive the data scrambled by the receiving system through the common interface, thereby performing the descrambling process of the received data. Alternatively, the external module may also transmit only the information required for the descrambling process to the receiving system. The common interface is configured on a physical layer and at least one protocol layer. Herein, in consideration of any possible expansion of the protocol layer in a later process, the corresponding protocol layer may be configured to have at least one layer that can each provide an independent function.

The external module may either consist of a memory or card having information on the key used for the scrambling process and other authentication information but not including any descrambling function, or consist of a card having the above-mentioned key information and authentication information and including the descrambling function. Both the receiving system and the external module should be authenticated in order to provide the user with the paid broadcasting service provided (or transmitted) from the transmitting system. Therefore, the transmitting system can only provide the corresponding paid broadcasting service to the authenticated pair of receiving system and external module.

Additionally, an authentication process should also be performed between the receiving system and the external module through the common interface. More specifically, the module may communicate with the system manager 7015 included in the receiving system through the common interface, thereby authenticating the receiving system. Alternatively, the receiving system may authenticate the module through the common interface. Furthermore, during the authentication process, the module may extract the unique ID of the receiving system and its own unique ID and transmit the extracted IDs to the transmitting system. Thus, the transmitting system may use the transmitted ID values as information determining whether to start the requested service or as payment information. Whenever necessary, the system manager 7015 transmits the payment information to the remote transmitting system through the telecommunication module 7019.

The authentication unit 7008 authenticates the corresponding receiving system and/or the external module. Then, if the authentication process is successfully completed, the authentication unit 7008 certifies the corresponding receiving system and/or the external module as a legitimate system and/or module entitled to receive the requested paid broadcasting service. In addition, the authentication unit 7008 may also receive authentication-associated information from a mobile telecommunications service provider to which the user of the receiving system is subscribed, instead of the transmitting system providing the requested broadcasting service. In this case, the authentication-association information may either be scrambled by the transmitting system providing the broadcasting service and, then, transmitted to the user through the mobile telecommunications service provider, or be directly scrambled and transmitted by the mobile telecommunications service provider. Once the authentication process is successfully completed by the authentication unit 7008, the receiving system may descramble the scrambled broadcasting contents received from the transmitting system. At this point, the descrambling process is performed by the first and second descramblers 7004 and 7007. Herein, the first and second descramblers 7004 and 7007 may be included in an internal module or an external module of the receiving system.

The receiving system is also provided with a common interface for communicating with the external module including the first and second descramblers 7004 and 7007, so as to perform the descrambling process. More specifically, the first and second descramblers 7004 and 7007 may be included in the module or in the receiving system in the form of hardware, middleware or software. Herein, the descramblers 7004 and 7007 may be included in any one of or both of the module and the receiving system. If the first and second descramblers 7004 and 7007 are provided inside the receiving system, it is advantageous to have the transmitting system (i.e., at least any one of a service provider and a broadcast station) scramble the corresponding data using the same scrambling method.

Alternatively, if the first and second descramblers 7004 and 7007 are provided in the external module, it is advantageous to have each transmitting system scramble the corresponding data using different scrambling methods. In this case, the receiving system is not required to be provided with the descrambling algorithm corresponding to each transmitting system. Therefore, the structure and size of receiving system may be simplified and more compact. Accordingly, in this case, the external module itself may be able to provide CA functions, which are uniquely and only provided by each transmitting systems, and functions related to each service that is to be provided to the user. The common interface enables the various external modules and the system manager 7015, which is included in the receiving system, to communicate with one another by a single communication method. Furthermore, since the receiving system may be operated by being connected with at least one or more modules providing different services, the receiving system may be connected to a plurality of modules and controllers.

In order to maintain successful communication between the receiving system and the external module, the common interface protocol includes a function of periodically checking the status of the opposite correspondent. By using this function, the receiving system and the external module is capable of managing the status of each opposite correspondent. This function also reports the user or the transmitting system of any malfunction that may occur in any one of the receiving system and the external module and attempts the recovery of the malfunction.

In yet another example, the authentication process may be performed through software. More specifically, when a memory card having CAS software downloaded, for example, and stored therein in advanced is inserted in the receiving system, the receiving system receives and loads the CAS software from the memory card so as to perform the authentication process. In this example, the CAS software is read out from the memory card and stored in the first memory 7012 of the receiving system. Thereafter, the CAS software is operated in the receiving system as an application program. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the CAS software is mounted on (or stored) in a middleware platform and, then executed. A Java middleware will be given as an example of the middleware included in the present invention. Herein, the CAS software should at least include information required for the authentication process and also information required for the descrambling process.

Therefore, the authentication unit 7008 performs authentication processes between the transmitting system and the receiving system and also between the receiving system and the memory card. At this point, as described above, the memory card should be entitled to receive the corresponding data and should include information on a normal receiving system that can be authenticated. For example, information on the receiving system may include a unique number, such as a standardized serial number of the corresponding receiving system. Accordingly, the authentication unit 7008 compares the standardized serial number included in the memory card with the unique information of the receiving system, thereby performing the authentication process between the receiving system and the memory card.

If the CAS software is first executed in the Java middleware base, then the authentication between the receiving system and the memory card is performed. For example, when the unique number of the receiving system stored in the memory card conforms to the unique number of the receiving system read from the system manager 7015, then the memory card is verified and determined to be a normal memory card that may be used in the receiving system. At this point, the CAS software may either be installed in the first memory 7012 upon the shipping of the present invention, or be downloaded to the first memory 7012 from the transmitting system or the module or memory card, as described above. Herein, the descrambling function may be operated by the data broadcasting application manger 7016 as an application program.

Thereafter, the CAS software parses the EMM/ECM packets outputted from the demultiplexer 7003, so as to verify whether the receiving system is entitled to receive the corresponding data, thereby obtaining the information required for descrambling (i.e., the CW) and providing the obtained CW to the descramblers 7004 and 7007. More specifically, the CAS software operating in the Java middleware platform first reads out the unique (or serial) number of the receiving system from the corresponding receiving system and compares it with the unique number of the receiving system transmitted through the EMM, thereby verifying whether the receiving system is entitled to receive the corresponding data. Once the receiving entitlement of the receiving system is verified, the corresponding broadcasting service information transmitted to the ECM and the entitlement of receiving the corresponding broadcasting service are used to verify whether the receiving system is entitled to receive the corresponding broadcasting service. Once the receiving system is verified to be entitled to receive the corresponding broadcasting service, the authentication key transmitted to the EMM is used to decode (or decipher) the encoded CW, which is transmitted to the ECM, thereby transmitting the decoded CW to the descramblers 7004 and 7007. Each of the descramblers 7004 and 7007 uses the CW to descramble the broadcasting service.

Meanwhile, the CAS software stored in the memory card may be expanded in accordance with the paid service which the broadcast station is to provide. Additionally, the CAS software may also include other additional information other than the information associated with the authentication and descrambling. Furthermore, the receiving system may download the CAS software from the transmitting system so as to upgrade (or update) the CAS software originally stored in the memory card. As described above, regardless of the type of broadcast receiving system, as long as an external memory interface is provided, the present invention may embody a CAS system that can meet the requirements of all types of memory card that may be detachably fixed to the receiving system. Thus, the present invention may realize maximum performance of the receiving system with minimum fabrication cost, wherein the receiving system may receive paid broadcasting contents such as broadcast programs, thereby acknowledging and regarding the variety of the receiving system. Moreover, since only the minimum application program interface is required to be embodied in the embodiment of the present invention, the fabrication cost may be minimized, thereby eliminating the manufacturer's dependence on CAS manufacturers. Accordingly, fabrication costs of CAS equipments and management systems may also be minimized.

Meanwhile, the descramblers 7004 and 7007 may be included in the module either in the form of hardware or in the form of software. In this case, the scrambled data that being received are descrambled by the module and then demodulated. Also, if the scrambled data that are being received are stored in the third memory 7018, the received data may be descrambled and then stored, or stored in the memory at the point of being received and then descrambled later on prior to being played (or reproduced). Thereafter, in case scramble/descramble algorithms are provided in the storage controller 7017, the storage controller 7017 scrambles the data that are being received once again and then stores the re-scrambled data to the third memory 7018.

In yet another example, the descrambled broadcasting contents (transmission of which being restricted) are transmitted through the broadcasting network. Also, information associated with the authentication and descrambling of data in order to disable the receiving restrictions of the corresponding data are transmitted and/or received through the telecommunications module 7019. Thus, the receiving system is able to perform reciprocal (or two-way) communication. The receiving system may either transmit data to the telecommunication module within the transmitting system or be provided with the data from the telecommunication module within the transmitting system. Herein, the data correspond to broadcasting data that are desired to be transmitted to or from the transmitting system, and also unique information (i.e., identification information) such as a serial number of the receiving system or MAC address.

The telecommunication module 7019 included in the receiving system provides a protocol required for performing reciprocal (or two-way) communication between the receiving system, which does not support the reciprocal communication function, and the telecommunication module included in the transmitting system. Furthermore, the receiving system configures a protocol data unit (PDU) using a tag-length-value (TLV) coding method including the data that are to be transmitted and the unique information (or ID information). Herein, the tag field includes indexing of the corresponding PDU. The length field includes the length of the value field. And, the value field includes the actual data that are to be transmitted and the unique number (e.g., identification number) of the receiving system.

The receiving system may configure a platform that is equipped with the Java platform and that is operated after downloading the Java application of the transmitting system to the receiving system through the network. In this case, a structure of downloading the PDU including the tag field arbitrarily defined by the transmitting system from a storage means included in the receiving system and then transmitting the downloaded PDU to the telecommunication module 7019 may also be configured. Also, the PDU may be configured in the Java application of the receiving system and then outputted to the telecommunication module 7019. The PDU may also be configured by transmitting the tag value, the actual data that are to be transmitted, the unique information of the corresponding receiving system from the Java application and by performing the TLV coding process in the receiving system. This structure is advantageous in that the firmware of the receiving system is not required to be changed even if the data (or application) desired by the transmitting system is added.

The telecommunication module within the transmitting system either transmits the PDU received from the receiving system through a wireless data network or configures the data received through the network into a PDU which is transmitted to the host. At this point, when configuring the PDU that is to be transmitted to the host, the telecommunication module within the transmitting end may include unique information (e.g., IP address) of the transmitting system which is located in a remote location. Additionally, in receiving and transmitting data through the wireless data network, the receiving system may be provided with a common interface, and also provided with a WAP, CDMA 1× EV-DO, which can be connected through a mobile telecommunication base station, such as CDMA and GSM, and also provided with a wireless LAN, mobile internet, WiBro, WiMax, which can be connected through an access point. The above-described receiving system corresponds to the system that is not equipped with a telecommunication function. However, a receiving system equipped with telecommunication function does not require the telecommunication module 7019.

The broadcasting data being transmitted and received through the above-described wireless data network may include data required for performing the function of limiting data reception. Meanwhile, the demultiplexer 7003 receives either the real-time data outputted from the demodulating unit 7002 or the data read from the third memory 7018, thereby performing demultiplexing. In this embodiment of the present invention, the demultiplexer 7003 performs demultiplexing on the enhanced data packet. Similar process steps have already been described earlier in the description of the present invention. Therefore, a detailed of the process of demultiplexing the enhanced data will be omitted for simplicity.

The first descrambler 7004 receives the demultiplexed signals from the demultiplexer 7003 and then descrambles the received signals. At this point, the first descrambler 7004 may receive the authentication result received from the authentication unit 7008 and other data required for the descrambling process, so as to perform the descrambling process. The audio decoder 7005 and the video decoder 7006 receive the signals descrambled by the first descrambler 7004, which are then decoded and outputted. Alternatively, if the first descrambler 7004 did not perform the descrambling process, then the audio decoder 7005 and the video decoder 7006 directly decode and output the received signals. In this case, the decoded signals are received and then descrambled by the second descrambler 7007 and processed accordingly.

Although the preferred embodiments of the present invention have been disclosed for illustrative purposes, those skilled in the art will appreciate that various modifications, additions and substitutions are possible, without departing from the scope and spirit of the invention as disclosed in the accompanying claims.

EFFECT OF THE INVENTION

As described above, the digital broadcasting system and data processing method according to the present invention are robust against (or resistant to) any error that may occur when transmitting mobile service data through a channel. And, the present invention is also highly compatible to the conventional system.

Moreover, the present invention may also receive the mobile service data without any error even in channels having severe ghost effect and noise.

By inserting known data in specific positions (or places) within a data region, the present invention may enhance the receiving performance of the receiving system in an environment undergoing frequent channel changes.

Additionally, when multiplexing the mobile service data with the main service data, by multiplexing the data in a burst structure, the power consumption level of the receiving system may be reduced.

Finally, the present invention is even more effective when applied to mobile and portable receivers, which are also liable to a frequent change in channel and which require protection (or resistance) against intense noise.

It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various modifications and variations can be made in the present invention without departing from the spirit or scope of the inventions. Thus, it is intended that the present invention covers the modifications and variations of this invention provided they come within the scope of the appended claims and their equivalents. 

1. A method of processing a broadcasting signal, the method comprising: generating a cell identifier, a virtual channel information for the cell identifier and a program table information including at least one piece of physical channel information for the cell identifier; multiplexing the program table information with mobile service data and modulating the multiplexed data; and transmitting the modulating data.
 2. The method of claim 1, wherein the physical channel information includes the physical channel information of a current cell and cells adjacent to the current cell.
 3. The method of claim 3, wherein the program table information includes at least one of a central frequency of the broadcasting signal transmitted from the cell, a bandwidth, information indicating whether the broadcasting signal is a burst signal, a modulation method of the broadcasting signal, and an error correction encoding method of the broadcasting signal.
 4. The method of claim 1, wherein the virtual channel information includes at least one of a major channel number of any channel of each cell, a minor channel number, a modulation mode of the broadcasting signal, a carrier frequency of the broadcasting signal, a channel transport stream identifier and the number of broadcasting programs transmitted through the channel.
 5. A method of receiving a broadcasting signal, the method comprising: receiving a broadcasting signal in which a cell identifier, a virtual channel information for the cell identifier and a program table information including at least one piece of physical channel information for the cell identifier are multiplexed with broadcasting data; demodulating, demultiplexing the broadcasting signal and decoding the program table information; obtaining the cell identifier, the virtual channel information for the cell identifier and the program table information from the decoded program table information.
 6. The method of claim 5, wherein the physical channel information includes the physical channel information of a current cell and cells adjacent to the current cell.
 7. The method of claim 5, wherein the program table information includes at least one of a central frequency of the broadcasting signal transmitted from the cell, a bandwidth, information indicating whether the broadcasting signal is a burst signal, a modulation method of the broadcasting signal, and an error correction encoding method of the broadcasting signal.
 8. The method of claim 5, wherein the virtual channel information includes at least one of a major channel number of any channel of each cell, a minor channel number, a modulation mode of the broadcasting signal, a carrier frequency of the broadcasting signal, a channel transport stream identifier and the number of broadcasting programs transmitted through the channel.
 9. A digital broadcasting system comprising: a tuner receiving a broadcasting signal in which a cell identifier, a virtual channel information for the cell identifier and a program table information including at least one piece of physical channel information for the cell identifier are multiplexed with broadcasting data; a demodulator demodulating the broadcasting signal according to a modulation scheme; a decoder decoding program table information and obtaining the cell identifier, the virtual channel information, and the program table information; and a controller controlling the tuner to tune the broadcasting signal using the physical channel information according to a changed cell.
 10. The digital broadcasting system of claim 9, wherein the wherein the physical channel information includes the physical channel information of a current cell and cells adjacent to the current cell. 